manualshive.com logo in svg

Extreme Networks ExtremeWare XOS 11.5, Command Reference Manual

The Extreme Networks ExtremeWare XOS 11.5 Command Reference Manual is a comprehensive manual that provides in-depth instructions for navigating the software. You can download this essential resource for free from the manualshive.com. Get your hands on the manual today to optimize your network performance.

Share
Download
background image

IP Multicast Commands

ExtremeWare XOS 11.5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch.    

ExtremeWare XOS 11.5 Command Reference Guide

1848

                      5:10             5         No

                      5:11             1         No

                      5:12             5         No

                      5:37             5         No

                      5:39             5         No

                      5:41             5         No

                      5:42             5         No

vcs7             4084        0                          Yes

vcs8             4083        0                          Yes

vhs2             4082        0                          Yes

hguo_fo          200         0                          Yes

vcs1             12          8                          Yes

                      4:16             0         Yes

vcs2             22          8                          Yes

                      4:16             0         Yes

vhs1             1717        14                         Yes

                      4:32             0         Yes

vms1             111         2                          Yes

                      4:10             5         Yes

gho              4061        0                          Yes

sqa_east         4059   

 0                          Yes

The following command displays IGMP snooping registration information on the VLAN 

accounting

:

show igmp snooping vlan accounting

Output from this command looks similar to the following:

VLAN accounting (4093) Snooping=Enabled

 Port Host           Subscribed   Age

 5:10 192.206.38.103 235.1.1.1(s) 0

 5:12 192.206.38.103 235.1.1.1(s) 0

 5:13 192.206.38.103 235.1.1.1(s) 0

 5:14 192.206.38.103 235.1.1.1(s) 0

 s = static igmp member

History

This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10.1.

Platform Availability

This command is available on all platforms.

Summary of Contents for ExtremeWare XOS 11.5

Page 1: ...579 2800 888 257 3000 http www extremenetworks com ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS Command Reference Guid...

Page 2: ...ademarks of Extreme Networks Inc or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Other names and marks may be the property of their respective owners 2006 Extreme Networks Inc All Rights...

Page 3: ...login failures 57 configure account password policy max age 59 configure account password policy min length 61 configure banner 63 configure cli max sessions 64 configure cli max failed logins 65 con...

Page 4: ...figure snmpv3 add group user 136 configure snmpv3 add mib view 138 configure snmpv3 add notify 140 configure snmpv3 add target addr 141 configure snmpv3 add target params 143 configure snmpv3 add user...

Page 5: ...5 show odometers 197 show power 200 show power budget 203 show power controller 207 show session 209 show snmpv3 access 211 show snmpv3 context 214 show snmpv3 counters 215 show snmpv3 engine info 217...

Page 6: ...mtu vlan 302 configure jumbo frame size 304 configure lacp member port priority 306 configure mirroring add 307 configure mirroring delete 312 configure ports auto off 314 configure ports auto on 316...

Page 7: ...show slot 407 unconfigure ports display string 412 unconfigure ports redundant 413 unconfigure slot 414 Chapter 6 Commands for Connectivity Fault Management 415 configure cfm domain add association i...

Page 8: ...p ports vendor specific avaya extreme poe conservation request 466 configure lldp ports vendor specific dot1 port vlan ID 468 configure lldp ports vendor specific dot1 port protocol vlan ID 469 config...

Page 9: ...le inline power legacy 528 enable inline power legacy slot 529 enable inline power ports 530 enable inline power slot 532 reset inline power ports 533 show inline power 534 show inline power configura...

Page 10: ...lth check all level 602 configure sys health check interval 605 configure sys recovery level 608 configure sys recovery level slot 610 configure sys recovery level switch 617 configure syslog add 619...

Page 11: ...log target format 711 unconfigure sflow 713 unconfigure sflow agent 714 unconfigure sflow collector 715 unconfigure sflow ports 717 upload log 718 Chapter 10 VLAN Commands 721 clear mac binding 722 c...

Page 12: ...le vlan 769 enable dot1p examination inner tag port 771 enable loopback mode vlan 772 enable vlan 773 show bvlan 774 show mac binding 776 show protocol 778 show svlan 779 show vlan 781 show vman 785 u...

Page 13: ...s list refresh blackhole 843 show access list 844 show access list configuration 846 show access list counter 847 show access list dynamic 849 show access list dynamic counter 850 show access list dyn...

Page 14: ...diffserv replacement port 912 disable dot1p examination ports 913 disable dot1p replacement ports 914 enable diffserv examination port 916 enable diffserv replacement ports 917 enable dot1p examinatio...

Page 15: ...igure tacacs accounting shared secret 983 configure tacacs accounting timeout 984 configure vlan dhcp address range 985 configure vlan dhcp lease timer 986 configure vlan dhcp options 987 disable dos...

Page 16: ...nner 1054 configure netlogin base url 1055 configure netlogin delete mac list 1056 configure netlogin dot1x eapol transmit version 1057 configure netlogin dot1x guest vlan 1058 configure netlogin dot1...

Page 17: ...onfig warnings on 1119 configure eaps delete control vlan 1120 configure eaps delete protected vlan 1121 configure eaps failtime 1123 configure eaps failtime expiry action 1125 configure eaps fast con...

Page 18: ...d ports priority 1199 configure stpd priority 1200 configure stpd tag 1202 configure vlan add ports stpd 1204 create stpd 1207 delete stpd 1209 disable stpd 1210 disable stpd auto bind 1211 disable st...

Page 19: ...e 1271 configure esrp ports no restart 1272 configure esrp ports restart 1273 configure esrp ports weight 1274 configure esrp priority 1276 configure esrp timer hello 1277 configure esrp timer neighbo...

Page 20: ...1333 configure iparp delete proxy 1334 configure iparp max_entries 1335 configure iparp max_pending_entries 1336 configure iparp max_proxy_entries 1337 configure iparp timeout 1338 configure iproute...

Page 21: ...rt unreachables 1379 enable icmp redirects 1380 enable icmp time exceeded 1381 enable icmp timestamp 1382 enable icmp unreachables 1383 enable icmp useredirects 1384 enable iparp checking 1385 enable...

Page 22: ...gure vlan router discovery delete prefix 1433 configure vlan router discovery default lifetime 1434 configure vlan router discovery hop limit 1435 configure vlan router discovery link mtu 1436 configu...

Page 23: ...1479 disable rip originate default 1480 disable rip poisonreverse 1481 disable rip splithorizon 1482 disable rip triggerupdates 1483 disable rip use ip router alert 1484 enable rip 1485 enable rip ag...

Page 24: ...ost 1539 configure ospf priority 1540 configure ospf authentication 1541 configure ospf add virtual link 1543 configure ospf add vlan area 1544 configure ospf add vlan area link type 1545 configure os...

Page 25: ...xport 1587 enable ospf originate default 1589 enable ospf restart helper lsa check 1590 enable ospf use ip router alert 1591 show ospf 1592 show ospf area 1593 show ospf area detail 1594 show ospf ase...

Page 26: ...ospfv3 1647 show ospfv3 area 1649 show ospfv3 interfaces 1651 show ospfv3 lsdb 1653 show ospfv3 lsdb stats 1655 show ospfv3 memory 1657 show ospfv3 neighbor 1658 show ospfv3 virtual link 1659 unconfig...

Page 27: ...lector client 1714 configure bgp peer group send community 1715 configure bgp peer group password 1716 configure bgp peer group remote AS number 1717 configure bgp peer group route policy 1718 configu...

Page 28: ...peer group capability 1769 enable bgp peer group remove private AS numbers 1770 enable bgp peer group soft in reset 1771 enable bgp peer group use ip router alert 1772 show bgp 1773 show bgp neighbor...

Page 29: ...e pim spt threshold 1824 configure pim ssm range 1825 configure pim timer vlan 1827 configure pim vlan trusted gateway 1828 disable igmp 1829 disable igmp snooping 1830 disable ipmcforwarding 1832 dis...

Page 30: ...snooping with proxy 1884 show mld 1885 show mld group 1887 show mld snooping 1888 show mld snooping vlan static 1890 unconfigure mld 1891 Appendix A Configuration and Image Commands 1893 configure fi...

Page 31: ...e debug tracefiles memorycard 1974 show debug 1975 show diagnostics 1977 show elrp 1981 show forwarding configuration 1983 show platform 1985 show tech 1986 top 1988 unconfigure elrp client 1990 Appen...

Page 32: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch Contents ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 32...

Page 33: ...ks switch configuration For conceptual information and guidance on configuring Extreme Networks switches see the ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide for your version of the ExtremeWare XOS software Termino...

Page 34: ...ollowing location http www extremenetworks com Table 1 Notice icons Icon Notice Type Alerts you to Note Important features or instructions Caution Risk of personal injury system damage or loss of data...

Page 35: ...s the following topics Audience on page 35 Structure of this Guide on page 36 Platforms and Required Software Versions on page 36 Software Licensing on page 37 Understanding the Command Syntax on page...

Page 36: ...fault The defaults if any for this command The default can be the default action of the command if optional arguments are not provided or it can be the default state of the switch such as for an enabl...

Page 37: ...e hereinafter referred to as the Summit X450 family of switches when referred to collectively Software Licensing NOTE Information on required licensing is in the Platform Availability section for each...

Page 38: ...XOS 11 5 you can obtain the Advanced Edge license for these switches The Core and Advanced Core licenses are not available for the Summit X450e series switch After you have obtained a license you cann...

Page 39: ...ore license and the Advanced Core license is not available for this switch NOTE Beginning with ExtremeWare XOS version 11 2 you can run BGP with a Core license Enabling and Displaying Licenses To enab...

Page 40: ...there are more names than can be displayed The syntax helper also provides assistance if you have entered an incorrect command Table 4 Command syntax symbols Symbol Description angle brackets Enclose...

Page 41: ...ric characters and underscores _ and cannot be keywords such as vlan stp and so on NOTE If you use the same name across categories for example STPD and EAPS names you must specify the identifying keyw...

Page 42: ...rts on a stand alone switch x y Specifies a noncontiguous series of ports on a stand alone switch x y a d Specifies a contiguous series of ports and a noncontiguous series of ports on a stand alone sw...

Page 43: ...rsor one character to the right Ctrl H or Backspace Deletes character to left of cursor and shifts remainder of line to left Delete or Ctrl D Deletes character under cursor and shifts remainder of lin...

Page 44: ...Command Reference Overview ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 44...

Page 45: ...name and use the ping command to test device reachability An administrator level account can view and change all switch parameters It can also add and delete users and change the password associated...

Page 46: ...ons You can re enable both user and administrative accounts once they have been disabled for exceeding the 3 failed login attempts NOTE The failsafe accounts are never locked out This command only cle...

Page 47: ...Description This command has no variables or parameters Default N A Usage Guidelines NOTE Use this command only under the guidance of an Extreme Networks representative This command clears licensing...

Page 48: ...nate by using the show session command The show session output displays information about current Telnet and or SSH2 sessions including The session number The login date and time The user name The typ...

Page 49: ...ord after you enter this command You must enter a password for this command passwords cannot be null NOTE Once you issue this command you cannot have a null password However if you want to have a null...

Page 50: ...marketing configure account marketing The switch responds with a password prompt password green Your keystrokes will not be echoed as you enter the new password After you enter the password the switc...

Page 51: ...ce it encrypts the plain text password The encrypted command should be used by the switch only to show store and load a system generated encrypted password in configuration this applies with the follo...

Page 52: ...d 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 52 Example The following command encrypts the password red for the account marketing configure account marketing encrypted red History...

Page 53: ...password must include at least two characters of each of the following four types Upper case A Z Lower case a z 0 9 The minimum number of characters for these specifically formatted passwords is 8 cha...

Page 54: ...ts only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 54 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Plat...

Page 55: ...gured the system returns an error message if a user attempts to change the password to one that is saved by the system up to the configured limit for that account this applies to both user and adminis...

Page 56: ...witch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 56 Platform Availability This command i...

Page 57: ...r level and administrator level accounts This command locks out the user after 3 consecutive failed login attempts the user s account must be specifically re enabled by an administrator Using the off...

Page 58: ...ts only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 58 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Plat...

Page 59: ...rom 1 to 365 days Existing sessions are not closed when the time limit expires it will not open the next time the user attempts to log in When a user logs into an account with an expired password the...

Page 60: ...witch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 60 Example The following command sets a 3 month time limit for the password for the account marketing configure account marketing password policy max...

Page 61: ...m password length is configurable from 1 to 32 characters Using the none option disables the requirement of minimum password length and returns the system to the default state password minimum is 0 by...

Page 62: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 62 Example The following command requires a minimum of 8 letters for the password for the account management configure account management password policy...

Page 63: ...at is displayed before the login prompt of each session To disable the acknowledgement feature use the configure banner command omitting the acknowledge parameter Example The following command adds a...

Page 64: ...us CLI sessions on the switch Syntax Description Default The default is eight sessions Usage Guidelines The value must be greater than 0 the range is 1 to 16 Example The following command limits the n...

Page 65: ...ailed logins permitted before the session is terminated Syntax Description Default The default is three logins Usage Guidelines The value must be greater than 0 the range is 1 to 10 Example The follow...

Page 66: ...all previous names fails to resolve a name the most recently added entry on the domain suffix list will be the last name used during name resolution This command will not overwrite any exiting entries...

Page 67: ...nfigure dns client add domain suffix xyz_inc com The following command specifies that the switch use the DNS server 10 1 2 1 configure dns client add name server 10 1 2 1 The following command on the...

Page 68: ...Default N A Usage Guidelines The default domain name will be used to create a fully qualified host name when a domain name is not specified For example if the default domain name is set to food com t...

Page 69: ...not the last entry in the list all items that had been added later are moved up in the list If no entries in the list match the domain name specified an error message will be displayed The default va...

Page 70: ...ts only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 70 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Plat...

Page 71: ...afe account enter failsafe user name blue5green enter failsafe password enter password again BD 10808 2 The failsafe account is immediately saved to NVRAM NOTE The information that you use to configur...

Page 72: ...eboot Use this command to reboot the current MSM on modular switches Help Use this command to display a short help text Exit Use this command to exit the failsafe account and return to the login promp...

Page 73: ...s This command configures the length of time the switch will wait before disconnecting idle console SSH2 or Telnet sessions The idletimeout feature must be enabled for this command to have an effect t...

Page 74: ...m presents you with the following interactive script Telnet is enabled by default Telnet is unencrypted and has been the target of security exploits in the past Would you like to disable Telnet y N No...

Page 75: ...only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 75 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Platfo...

Page 76: ...ntire time date string If you provide one item at a time and press Tab the screen prompts you for the next item Press cr to complete the input Example The following command configures a system date of...

Page 77: ...fication May be up to six characters in length The default is an empty string dst_offset Specifies an offset from standard time in minutes Value is in the range of 1 to 60 Default is 60 minutes floati...

Page 78: ...ends specification defaults to every last sunday october The ends date may occur earlier in the year than the begins date This will be the case for countries in the Southern Hemisphere If you specify...

Page 79: ...Brussels Belgium Vienna Austria Madrid Spain Rome Italy Bern Switzerland Stockholm Sweden Oslo Norway 2 00 120 EET Eastern European Russia Zone 1 Athens Greece Helsinki Finland Istanbul Turkey Jerusal...

Page 80: ...0 configure timezone name EST 300 autodst name EDT configure timezone 300 autodst The following command configures the GMT offset and automatic DST adjustment for the Middle European timezone with the...

Page 81: ...d enter the password in plain text The encrypted option is used by the switch after encrypting the plain text password The encrypted option should be used by the switch only to show store and load a s...

Page 82: ...account names must have a minimum of 1 character and can have a maximum of 32 characters Passwords must have a minimum of 0 characters and can have a maximum of 32 characters Passwords are case sensi...

Page 83: ...Depending on the software version running on your switch and the type of switch you have additional account information may be displayed You must have administrator privileges to delete a user account...

Page 84: ...witch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 84 Platform Availability This command i...

Page 85: ...re that completes a command automatically with the spacebar If you disable this feature the Tab key can still be used for auto completion Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables...

Page 86: ...hanism and allows the display to print continuously to the screen CLI paging is only active on a per shell session basis In other words when you enable or disable CLI paging from within the current co...

Page 87: ...idle time outs are disabled console sessions remain open until the switch is rebooted or until you logoff Telnet sessions remain open until you close the Telnet client To view the status of idle time...

Page 88: ...meWare XOS feature that completes a command automatically with the spacebar The Tab key can also be used for auto completion Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disab...

Page 89: ...tch use the show management command The show management command displays information about the switch including the enable disable state for CLI paging If CLI paging is enabled and you use the show te...

Page 90: ...ed if it has been idle for the required length of time This ensures that there are no hanging connections To change the period of inactivity that triggers the timeout for a Telnet SSH2 or console sess...

Page 91: ...e factory or by obtaining a license voucher from your Extreme Networks supplier You can obtain a regular license you cannot downgrade licenses The voucher contains all the necessary information on the...

Page 92: ...information is stored in EEPROM and persists through reboots software upgrades power outages and reconfigurations If you attempt to execute a command and you do not either have the required license o...

Page 93: ...rguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines ExtremeWare XOS remembers all the commands you entered on the switch Use the history command to display a list of these commands Example The followin...

Page 94: ...to be sent continuously This option can be interrupted by pressing Ctrl C end size Specifies an end size for packets to be sent udp Specifies that the ping request should use UDP instead of ICMP dont...

Page 95: ...nk local address you must specify the VLAN you sending the message from as shown in the following example you must include the sign ping ipv6 link local address vlan_name host NOTE You must specify th...

Page 96: ...Modular switches only The modules that can be rebooted are switch fabric MSM modules BlackDiamond 8800 series switch only On the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch if your default BootROM image becomes c...

Page 97: ...History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The alternate BootROM image was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 The warm parameter was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 3 it was deleted in E...

Page 98: ...eges The show accounts command displays the following information in a tabular format User Name The name of the user This list displays all of the users who have access to the switch Access This may b...

Page 99: ...e Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 99 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Avail...

Page 100: ...to validating a new password Minimum length The minimum number of characters in passwords Character validation The passwords must be in the specific format required by the configure account password p...

Page 101: ...ory limit None Password Min length None Password Character Validation Disabled Accts lockout on login failures Disabled Accounts locked out No User Name Password Password Password Password Flags Expir...

Page 102: ...or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to view the banner that is displayed before the login prompt Example The following command displays the switch banner show banner Output fro...

Page 103: ...o arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays the DNS configuration show dns client Output from this command looks similar to the following Number o...

Page 104: ...enabled on the switch NOTE Refer to the specific chapter that discusses each feature of the ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide to determine if a license is required for some functionality If not noted all...

Page 105: ...ollowing command displays the license level configuration show licenses Output from this command looks similar to the following Enabled License Level Core Enabled Feature Packs None History This comma...

Page 106: ...Watchdog state Current date time system boot time and time zone configuration Any scheduled reboot information MSM information available only on modular switches Current state available only on stand...

Page 107: ...Sat May 15 17 19 29 2006 Next Reboot None scheduled MSM MSM A MSM B Current State MASTER INIT Image Selected primary Image Booted primary Primary ver 11 5 1 0 Secondary ver 11 5 1 0 Config Selected p...

Page 108: ...rence Guide 108 Config Selected primary cfg Config Booted primary cfg primary cfg Created by ExtremeWare XOS version 11 2 0 16 93463 bytes saved on Sat April 14 04 24 31 2006 The show switch detail co...

Page 109: ...n the switch and the given IPv6 address vr Specifies a virtual router NOTE User created VRs are not available on the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch or the Summit X450 family of switches vrid Specifie...

Page 110: ...route 123 45 67 8 The following is sample output that displays when the traceroute fails traceroute to 10 209 10 37 30 hops max 1 0 0 0 0 u u u Packet Response Error Flags No response N ICMP network u...

Page 111: ...receivers Entries in this list can be created modified and deleted using the RMON2 trapDestTable MIB table as described in RFC 2021 and the SNMPv3 tables Authorized managers An authorized manager can...

Page 112: ...dules running the bridging and routing protocols and configuring the switch The primary also keeps synchronized with the backup MSM in case the backup MSM needs to take over the management functions i...

Page 113: ...family switch Simple Network Time Protocol ExtremeWare XOS supports the client portion of the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Version 3 based on RFC1769 SNTP can be used by the switch to update and...

Page 114: ...will not participate in leader election Configuration priority This is a user assigned priority The configured priority is compared only after the node meets the minimum thresholds in each category f...

Page 115: ...he Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 115 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Ava...

Page 116: ...110V AC inputs OR If the PSUs with 110V AC inputs are disabled then the PSUs with 220V AC inputs can be budgeted with a higher output per PSU ExtremeWare XOS computes the total available power using...

Page 117: ...nfigure power supply ps_num on command NOTE If you override automatic power supply management you may reduce the available power and cause one or more I O modules to power down To resume using automat...

Page 118: ...ly the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 118 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 3 Platform...

Page 119: ...ng the defaults An authorized trap receiver must be configured to use the correct community strings on the switch for the trap receiver to receive switch generated traps In some cases it may be useful...

Page 120: ...itch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 120 Platform Availability This command i...

Page 121: ...ed traps The switch sends SNMP traps to all trap receivers configured to receive the specific trap group To view the SNMP trap receivers configured on the switch use the show management command The sh...

Page 122: ...trapreceiver 10 101 0 105 community green port 3003 The following command adds the IP address 10 101 0 105 as a trap receiver with community string blue and IP address 10 101 0 25 as the source confi...

Page 123: ...to the switch The default read only community string is public read write community strings provide read and write access to the switch The default read write community string is private Sixteen read...

Page 124: ...s only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 124 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Plat...

Page 125: ...only the first SNMPv1 v2c trap receiver whose IP address and port number match the specified value Example The following command deletes the trap receiver 10 101 0 100 from the trap receiver list con...

Page 126: ...switch A maximum of 255 characters is allowed To view the name of the system contact listed on the switch use the show switch command The show switch command displays switch statistics including the...

Page 127: ...llowed To view the location of the switch on the switch use the show switch command The show switch command displays switch statistics including the location of the switch Example The following comman...

Page 128: ...A maximum of 32 characters is allowed The sysname appears in the switch prompt To view the name of the system listed on the switch use the show switch command The show switch command displays switch s...

Page 129: ...lied in ASCII format sec model Specifies the security model to use snmpv1 Specifies the SNMPv1 security model snmpv2c Specifies the SNMPv2c security model usm Specifies the SNMPv3 User based Security...

Page 130: ...ha initialmd5Priv and initialshaPriv The default access defined permanent are admin initial v1v2c_ro v1v2c_rw and v1v2cNotifyGroup Example In the following command access for the group defaultROGroup...

Page 131: ...name comm_public user v1v2c_user hex_community_index Specifies the row index in the snmpCommunity table as a hex value supplied as a colon separated string of hex octets community_index Specifies the...

Page 132: ...ity name hex of EA 12 CD CF AB 11 3C user security name v1v2c_user using transport tag 34872 and volatile storage configure snmpv3 add community hex 12 0E name hex EA 12 CD CF AB 11 3C user v1v2c_user...

Page 133: ...ciate a filter profile with a parameter name and the parameter name with a target address This command can be used multiple times to configure the exact filter profile desired Example The following co...

Page 134: ...switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 134 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The hex_profile_name parameter was a...

Page 135: ...series of filters so in effect you are associating a series of filters with a target address Example The following command associates the filter profile prof1 with the parameter name P1 configure snmp...

Page 136: ...ame the security name value is the same username Every group is uniquely identified by a security name and security model So the same security name can be associated to a group name but with different...

Page 137: ...wing command associates the user userv3 with security model USM and storage type volatile to the access group defaultRoGroup configure snmpv3 add group defaultRoGroup user userV3 volatile History This...

Page 138: ...nent and cannot be deleted but they can be modified The default views are defaultUserView defaultAdminView and defaultNotifyView Example The following command creates the MIB view allMIB with the subt...

Page 139: ...llowing command creates a view vrrpTrapNewMaster which excludes VRRP notification 1 and the entry is volatile configure snmpv3 add mib view vrrpTrapNewMaster 1 3 6 1 2 1 68 0 1 ff8 type excluded volat...

Page 140: ...the target addresses Example The following command sends notifications to addresses associated with the tag type1 configure snmpv3 add notify N1 tag type1 History This command was first available in...

Page 141: ...ages to the target address and an entry in the snmpNotifyFilterProfileTable which specifies filter profiles to use for notifications to the target address The filter profiles are associated with the f...

Page 142: ...A1 param P1 ipaddress 10 203 0 22 The following command specifies a target address of 10 203 0 22 with the name A1 and associates it with the security parameters and target address parameter P1 and t...

Page 143: ...name see the command configure snmpv3 add target addr hex_param_name Specifies the parameter name associated with the target The value is to be supplied as a colon separated string of hex octets para...

Page 144: ...eters entry named P1 a user name of guest message processing and security model of SNMPv2c and a security level of no authentication configure snmpv3 add target params P1 user guest mp model snmpv2c s...

Page 145: ...st specify authentication if you want to specify privacy There is no support for privacy without authentication The default user names are admin initial initialmd5 initialsha initialmd5Priv initialsha...

Page 146: ...to use MD5 authentication with the password palertyu configure snmpv3 add user authMD5 authentication md5 palertyu The following command configures the user authShapriv to use SHA authentication with...

Page 147: ...th_password auth_password privacy hex hex_priv_password priv_password volatile Users cloned from the default users will have the storage type of non volatile The default names are admin initial initia...

Page 148: ...association from the VACMSecurityToGroupTable To remove the association use the following command configure snmpv3 delete group hex hex_group_name group_name user all non defaults hex hex_user_name us...

Page 149: ...rGroup configure snmpv3 delete access userGroup The following command deletes the group userGroup with the security model snmpv1 and security level of authentication and no privacy authnopriv configur...

Page 150: ...ty comm_index The following command creates an entry with the community name hex of EA 12 CD CF AB 11 3C configure snmpv3 delete community name hex EA 12 CD CF AB 11 3C History This command was first...

Page 151: ...ecify a profile name and a subtree to delete just those entries for that filter profile and subtree Example The following command deletes the filters from the filter profile prof1 that reference the M...

Page 152: ...ameter name to delete just those entries for that filter profile and parameter name Example The following command deletes the filter profile prof1 with the parameter name P1 configure snmpv3 delete fi...

Page 153: ...security name value is the same username Every group is uniquely identified by a security name and security model So the same security name can be associated to a group name but with different securit...

Page 154: ...p for the security model snmpv2c configure snmpv3 delete group UserGroup user guest sec model snmpv2c The following command deletes the user guest from the group userGroup with the security model USM...

Page 155: ...defaultAdminView and defaultNotifyView Use the configure snmpv3 add mib view command to remove a MIB view from its security group by specifying a different view Example The following command deletes a...

Page 156: ...f switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 156 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The hex_view_name parameter was add...

Page 157: ...ated with the tags present in the table notifications will be sent based on the filters also associated with the target addresses The one default notification that cannot be deleted is defaultNotify E...

Page 158: ...this command to delete an entry in the SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddressTable Example The following command deletes target address named A1 configure snmpv3 delete target addr A1 History This command was firs...

Page 159: ...e message processing model security level security model and the storage parameters for messages to any target addresses associated with a particular parameter name Example The following command delet...

Page 160: ...implicitly remove the related group to user association from the VACMSecurityToGroupTable To remove the association use the following command configure snmpv3 delete group hex hex_group_name group_nam...

Page 161: ...er ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 161 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 162: ...lt N A Usage Guidelines Use this command if the Engine Boots value needs to be explicitly configured Engine Boots and Engine Time will be reset to zero if the Engine ID is changed Engine Boots can be...

Page 163: ...ID Once the snmpEngineID is changed default users will be reverted back to their original passwords keys while non default users will be reset to the security level of no authorization no privacy In a...

Page 164: ...if it is not synchronized the switch queries the second server If the switch cannot obtain the time it restarts the query process Otherwise the switch waits for the sntp client update interval before...

Page 165: ...switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 165 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The vr vr_name option was added in Ex...

Page 166: ...te interval update interval Description Configures the interval between polls for time information from SNTP servers Syntax Description Default 64 seconds Usage Guidelines None Example The following c...

Page 167: ...message indicating that the file does not exist Use the none option to remove a previously configured ACL Creating an ACL Policy File To create an ACL policy file use the edit policy command For more...

Page 168: ...11 5 Command Reference Guide 168 Example This example assumes that you already created an ACL to apply to Telnet The following command applies the ACL MyAccessProfile_2 to Telnet configure telnet acce...

Page 169: ...ed port the switch displays an error message similar to the following configure telnet port 22 Error port number is a reserved port If this occurs select a port number that is not a reserved port Begi...

Page 170: ...itch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 170 Platform Availability This command i...

Page 171: ...v6 connections If you specify all the switch listens on all of the available virtual routers for Telnet connections The vr_name specifies the name of the virtual router to use for Telnet connections I...

Page 172: ...mily of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 172 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Support for IPv6 was added in...

Page 173: ...f DHCP packets on a VLAN to obtain an IP address for the VLAN from a DHCP server Syntax Description Default Disabled for all VLANs Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables the gene...

Page 174: ...you will be unable to access the switch using SNMP To allow access use the following command enable snmp access By using the enable and disable commands you can enable all SNMP access no SNMP access o...

Page 175: ...P trap receivers that have been configured The command prevents SNMP traps from being sent from the switch even if trap receivers are configured To view if SNMP traps are being sent from the switch us...

Page 176: ...e switch to update and synchronize its internal clock from a Network Time Protocol NTP server After the SNTP client has been enabled the switch sends out a periodic query to the indicated NTP server o...

Page 177: ...services on the system Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines You must be logged in as an administrator to enable or disable Telnet Example Wit...

Page 178: ...essing loop any unhandled exception or a hardware problem with the communication channel to the watchdog In most cases if the watchdog timer expires the switch captures the current CPU status and post...

Page 179: ...DHCP packets on a VLAN to obtain an IP address for the VLAN from a DHCP server Syntax Description Default Disabled for all VLANs Usage Guidelines None Example The following command enables the genera...

Page 180: ...oth v1 v2c and v3 access so the switch can be accessed with either method Use the following commands to allow only v3 access enable snmp access disable snmp access snmp v1v2c Use the following command...

Page 181: ...ng the following commands unconfigure switch all configure safe default script If you return to safe defaults mode you must answer the questions presented during the interactive script For more detail...

Page 182: ...thorized trap receiver can be one or more network management stations on your network The switch sends SNMP traps to all trap receivers To view if SNMP traps are being sent from the switch use the sho...

Page 183: ...h to update and synchronize its internal clock from a Network Time Protocol NTP server After the SNTP client has been enabled the switch sends out a periodic query to the indicated NTP server or the s...

Page 184: ...Telnet and switch ports are enabled by default the script prompts you to confirm those settings If you choose to keep the default setting for Telnet the default setting is enabled the switch returns t...

Page 185: ...e Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 185 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Avai...

Page 186: ...ing loop any unhandled exception or a hardware problem with the communication channel to the watchdog In most cases if the watchdog timer expires the switch captures the current CPU status and posts i...

Page 187: ...command you are asked to save your configuration changes to the current active configuration Enter y if you want to save your changes Enter n if you do not want to save your changes Example The follow...

Page 188: ...you issue this command you are asked to save your configuration changes to the current active configuration Enter y if you want to save your changes Enter n if you do not want to save your changes Exa...

Page 189: ...command you are asked to save your configuration changes to the current active configuration Enter y if you want to save your changes Enter n if you do not want to save your changes Example The follow...

Page 190: ...ays the client state for all existing VLANs Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays the DHCP BOOTP status for all VLANs show dhcp client state Depending on your configurations out...

Page 191: ...d Depending on the software version running on your switch and the type of switch you have additional or different checkpoint status information may be displayed Example The following command displays...

Page 192: ...000008D3 vrrp 378 0 0 0 0 0 ON OK 1 000008D3 tftpd 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON OK 1 000008D3 thttpd 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON OK 1 000008D3 rip 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON OK 1 000008D3 dosprotect 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON OK 1 000008D3 epm 0 0 0 0...

Page 193: ...MP community strings SNMP trap receiver list For ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 and later the following management output is also displayed SNMP trap receiver source IP address SNMP statistics counter SSH acces...

Page 194: ...alid tcp port 22 vr all Access Profile not set SNMP access Enabled Total Read Only Communities 1 Total Read Write Communities 1 RMON Disabled SNMP Traps Enabled SNMP v1 v2c TrapReceivers None SNMP sta...

Page 195: ...he checkpoint state data from the master DOWN In the down state the node is not available to participate in leader election The node enters this state during any user action other than a failure that...

Page 196: ...g is sample output from this command Node State Priority SwHealth HwHealth MSM A MASTER 0 49 7 MSM B BACKUP 0 49 7 If you specify the detail option the same information is displayed on a per node basi...

Page 197: ...ponent On a modular switch this means that even if you plug in the component into a different chassis the odometer counter is available in the new switch chassis Monitored Components On a modular swit...

Page 198: ...7 G60T 184 Dec 03 2003 Slot 8 10G6X 146 Jan 12 2004 MSM A MSM 1XL 62 Apr 21 2004 MSM B MSM 1XL 172 Dec 14 2003 PSUCTRL 1 152 Mar 17 2004 PSUCTRL 2 The following is sample output from the BlackDiamond...

Page 199: ...ies switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 199 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Information about the power controller s for modular switches was added to...

Page 200: ...On The power supply is on and working normally Modular switches only Located next to the State of the power supply the following information provides more detailed status information Options are Disab...

Page 201: ...celsius the current temperature of the power supply Input Specifies the input voltage and the current requirements of the power supply and whether the input is AC or DC Output 1 and Output 2 Specifie...

Page 202: ...output assumes that you have not installed an EPS PowerSupply 1 information State Powered On PartInfo Internal Power Supply PowerSupply 2 information State Empty The following sample output assumes t...

Page 203: ...number of the power supply Current state of the power supply Options are Empty There is no power supply installed Power Failed The power supply has failed Power Off The power supply is off Power On Th...

Page 204: ...eeds the required power the system has N 1 power Yes The system has redundant N 1 power No The system does not have redundant N 1 power The information contained in this display is for planning purpos...

Page 205: ...800 series switch PS State Watts 48V 12V 1 Powered On 1152 00 1104 00 48 00 2 Powered On 1152 00 1104 00 48 00 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 Empty Power Available 2304 00 2208 00 96 00 Redundant N 1 Power...

Page 206: ...as first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Power over Ethernet PoE data inline power was added to the show power budget output in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 PoE data is displayed when you install a G48P mod...

Page 207: ...oller Options are Empty There is no power supply controller installed Operational The power supply controller is installed and operational Present The power supply controller is installed PartInfo Pro...

Page 208: ...PSU CTRL Mode Master PSUCTRL 2 information State Empty If you have two power supply controllers installed the switch displays output about both of the power supply controllers PSUCTRL 1 information S...

Page 209: ...put detail The output for all current sessions is displayed in a list format sessID The output for the specified session is displayed in a list format history Displays a list of current and previous s...

Page 210: ...5 admin telnet local dis 10 255 44 55 The following command displays a list of current and previous sessions on the switch show session history The following is sample output from this command Session...

Page 211: ...displays the SNMPv3 vacmAccessTable entries Example The following command displays all the access details show snmpv3 access The following is sample output from this command Group Name admin Context P...

Page 212: ...rity Level No Authentication No Privacy Context Match Exact Read View defaultUserView Write View defaultUserView Notify View defaultNotifyView Storage Type Permanent Row Status Active Group Name v1v2c...

Page 213: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 213 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Av...

Page 214: ...command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines This command displays the entries in the View based Access Control Model VACM context table VACMContextTable Example The following co...

Page 215: ...counters snmpUnknownSecurityModels snmpInvalidMessages snmpUnknownPDUHandlers usmStatsUnsupportedSecLevels usmStatsNotInTimeWindows usmStatsUnknownUserNames usmStatsUnknownEngineIDs usmStatsWrongDige...

Page 216: ...mily of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 216 usmStatsWrongDigests 0 usmStatsDecryptionErrors 0 History This command was first available in...

Page 217: ...auto generated from MAC address of switch or the ID manually configured Engine Boots Number of times the agent has been rebooted Engine Time Time since agent last rebooted in centiseconds Max Message...

Page 218: ...le name you will display all entries for that profile name If you do not specify a profile name then all the entries are displayed Example The following command displays the part of filter profile pro...

Page 219: ...tremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 219 Platform Availability This command is avail...

Page 220: ...es of filters so in effect you are associating a series of filters with a target address Example The following command displays the entry with filter profile prof1 with the parameter name P1 show snmp...

Page 221: ...e ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 221 Platform Availability This command is a...

Page 222: ...SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroupTable Example The following command displays information about all groups for every security model and user name show snmpv3 group The following is sample output from this co...

Page 223: ...rity Model USM Storage Type Permanent Row Status Active Group Name initial Security Name initial Security Model USM Storage Type Permanent Row Status Active Group Name initial Security Name initialmd5...

Page 224: ...up testgroup and user name testuser show snmpv3 group testgroup user testuser The following is sample output from this command Group Name testgroup Security Name testuser Security Model USM Storage Ty...

Page 225: ...elonging to the view name will be displayed This command displays the SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamilyTable Example The following command displays all the view details show snmpv3 mib view The following is s...

Page 226: ...ent Row Status Active View Name defaultUserView MIB Subtree 1 3 6 1 6 3 15 1 2 2 1 9 View Type Excluded Storage Type Permanent Row Status Active View Name defaultAdminView MIB Subtree 1 View Type Incl...

Page 227: ...s traps If no notify name is specified all the entries are displayed Example The following command displays the notify table entry for N1 show snmpv3 notify N1 The following is sample output from this...

Page 228: ...for all the target addresses will be displayed To view the source IP address use the show management command Example The following command displays the entry for the target address named A1 show snmp...

Page 229: ...History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 This command was modified in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 to display a list of tags if more than one was configured and to display the timeout...

Page 230: ...in the SNMPv3 extremeTargetAddressExtTable Example The following command displays the entry for the target address named A1 show snmpv3 extreme target addr ext A1 The following is sample output from t...

Page 231: ...to any target addresses associated with a particular parameter name If no parameter name is specified all the entries are displayed Example The following command displays the target parameter entry na...

Page 232: ...itch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 232 Platform Availability This command i...

Page 233: ...be displayed The user entries in SNMPv3 are stored in the USMUserTable so the entries are indexed by EngineID and user name Example The following command lists all user entries show snmpv3 user The f...

Page 234: ...No Privacy Storage Type Permanent Row Status Active Engine ID 80 00 07 7c 03 00 04 96 1f a2 60 H User Name initialmd5Priv Security Name initialmd5Priv Authentication HMAC MD5 Privacy DES Storage Type...

Page 235: ...he SNTP configuration show sntp client The following is sample output from this command SNTP client is enabled SNTP time is valid Primary server 172 17 1 104 Secondary server 172 17 1 104 Query interv...

Page 236: ...s only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 236 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Plat...

Page 237: ...o open a Telnet connection you must specify the host IP address or the host name of the device you want to connect to Check the user manual supplied with the Telnet facility if you are unsure of how t...

Page 238: ...at system boot up are VR Mgmt VR Control and VR Default however you can only Telnet on VR Mgmt and VR Default On the BlackDiamond 10808 switch you can also create and configure your own virtual route...

Page 239: ...the system to Telnet into the other installed MSM If Telnet is disabled the MSM you are attempting to access will time out For example if you connect to MSM A and attempt to Telnet to MSM B MSM B wil...

Page 240: ...ly the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 240 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Platform...

Page 241: ...If the TFTP server does not support blocksize negotiation the file size is limited to 32 MB Older TFTP servers that do not support blocksize negotiation have additional implementation host name Specif...

Page 242: ...a policy file use the refresh policy command to reprocess the text file and update the policy database You also use TFTP to upload a saved configuration file or policy file from the switch to the TFTP...

Page 243: ...the internal memory card specify the internal memory option to transfer those files from the internal memory card to a TFTP server If you have a modular switch you can transfer core dump information t...

Page 244: ...server with an IP address of 10 123 45 67 tftp 10 123 45 67 g r XOS1 cfg The following command retrieves and transfers files from the external memory card installed in a modular switch tftp 10 1 2 3 g...

Page 245: ...ackDiamond 8800 series switch and the Summit X450 family of switches do not support user created VRs NetASCII and mail file type formats are not supported host name Specifies the name of the remote ho...

Page 246: ...the switch automatically overrides the existing file If you successfully download the file the switch displays a message similar to the following Downloading test cfg to switch done This command was...

Page 247: ...ummit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 247 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platform Availab...

Page 248: ...s are not supported This command was introduced to simplify using TFTP to transfer configuration policy and if configured core dump files from the switch to the TFTP server You can continue to use the...

Page 249: ...Local and remote filename character restrictions Virtual router requirements Internal memory and core dump files Topics related to only modular switches Other useful commands See the tftp command on...

Page 250: ...Commands for Managing the Switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 250...

Page 251: ...e file system structure allows you to keep save rename and maintain multiple copies of configuration files on the switch In addition you can manage other entities of the switch such as policies and ac...

Page 252: ...fy process the switch clears and resets the CPU utilization history for the specified process Modular Switches Only If you specify slot the switch clears and resets the CPU utilization history for the...

Page 253: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 253 Platform Availability This command is avai...

Page 254: ...ed configuration files have the xsf file extension See Appendix A Software Upgrade and Boot Options in the ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide for more information internal memory Specifies the internal me...

Page 255: ...ot root 100980 Sep 23 09 16 test cfg rw r r 1 root root 100980 Oct 13 08 47 test_rev2 cfg If you enter n the switch displays a message similar to the following Copy cancelled Case sensitive Filenames...

Page 256: ...the memorycard option the source and or destination is the memorycard You must mount the memory card for this operation to succeed The cp command copies a file from the switch to the external memory c...

Page 257: ...uidelines Use this command to disable CPU monitoring on the switch This command does not clear the monitoring interval Therefore if you altered the CPU monitoring interval this command does not return...

Page 258: ...on the switch Command Syntax This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines Use this command to disable the XML configuration mode on the switch XML configuration mode i...

Page 259: ...keyword Extreme Networks recommends the default setting for most network environments If you enter a number lower than 20 seconds CPU utilization may increase CPU usage is measured in percentages By d...

Page 260: ...XOS Software ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 260 Platform Availability This...

Page 261: ...ration mode is not supported for end users and Extreme Networks strongly cautions you not to enable this mode Use this command only under the direction of Extreme Networks If you inadvertently issue t...

Page 262: ...card including core dump files if so configured For more information about core dump files see Core Dump Files on page 263 Understanding the Output Output from this command includes the following The...

Page 263: ...MSM You were unable to display a list of configuration and policy files on the backup MSM Example The following command displays a list of all current configuration and policy files in the system ls...

Page 264: ...XOS Software ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 264 Platform Availability This...

Page 265: ...tion Policy files have the pol file extension Core dump files have the gz file extension See Internal Memory and Core Dump Files on page 266 for more information internal memory Specifies the internal...

Page 266: ...o rename config test cfg No such file or directory Since the switch is unable to locate test cfg the file is not renamed Local Filename Character Restrictions This section provides information about t...

Page 267: ...Testb91 cfg Activeb91 cfg On a modular switch with an external memory card installed the following command moves the configuration file named test1 cfg from the switch to the external memory card mv t...

Page 268: ...cess Depending on the software version running on your switch and the type of switch you have you can terminate and restart different or additional processes To see which processes you can restart dur...

Page 269: ...17 00 52 2005 cli 3 0 0 22 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 52 2005 devmgr 3 0 0 2 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 52 2005 dirser 3 0 0 2 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 51 2005 dosprotect 3 0 0 1 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 56...

Page 270: ...following Error Cannot remove current selected active configuration file When you delete a file from the switch a message similar to the following appears Remove testpolicy pol from switch y n Enter...

Page 271: ...oftware download or move or delete the core dump files from the internal memory For example if you have a modular switch with an external memory card installed with space available transfer the files...

Page 272: ...ard rm memorycard test pol On a modular switch with an external memory card installed the following command removes all of the configuration files from the external memory card rm memorycard cfg Histo...

Page 273: ...ches Only If you issue the command without any parameters the switch displays CPU utilization history for all of the processes running on the MSMs installed in your system Reading the Output The show...

Page 274: ...0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MSM A GNSS_pktif 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MSM A GNSS_switch 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MSM A aaa 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 4 0 82 0 56 MSM A acl 0 0...

Page 275: ...evmgr n a n a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 5 74 44 24 52 dirser n a n a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dosprotect n a n a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 12 eaps n a n a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5 5 36 40 15 41 e...

Page 276: ...alth information polling and reporting Both polling and reporting measure the heartbeat of the process Polling occurs when a HELLO message is sent and a HELLO_ACK message is received The two counts ar...

Page 277: ...MSM A epm 0 0 Unknown MSM A exacl 0 0 Unknown The following is sample output from a SummitX450 series switch Process Name Hello HelloAck Last Heartbeat Time aaa 0 254328 Tue Feb 10 05 21 46 2004 acl...

Page 278: ...ries switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 278 The following is sample output from the Summit X450 series switch Process Name Hello HelloAck Last Heartbeat Time stp 50870 50870 Tue Feb 1...

Page 279: ...can also use the show memory process name slot slotid command to view the system memory and the memory used by the individual processes Modular Switches Only If you issue the command without any param...

Page 280: ...command System Memory Information MSM A Total DRAM KB 524288 MSM A System KB 45912 MSM A User KB 102264 MSM A Free KB 376112 Memory Utilization Statistics Card Slot Process Name Memory KB MSM A 9 aaa...

Page 281: ...rrent system memory information for the Summit X450 family of switches show memory The following is sample output from this command System Memory Information Total DRAM KB 262144 System KB 25852 User...

Page 282: ...lldp 8816 mcmgr 17836 msgsrv 6960 netLogin 8924 netTools 11524 nettx 70 nodemgr 9636 ospf 18124 ospfv3 0 pim 15996 poe 8936 polMgr 7576 rip 17736 ripng 0 rtmgr 16016 snmpMaster 15416 snmpSubagent 2642...

Page 283: ...m Depending on the software version running on your switch or your switch model additional or different memory information might be displayed You can also use the show memory slot a b command to view...

Page 284: ...tput from a modular switch System Memory Information MSM A Total KB 512508 KB MSM A Free KB 395796 KB Memory Utilization Statistics Card Slot Process Name Memory KB MSM A 9 vrrp 6596 The following is...

Page 285: ...The name of the module where the process is running modular switches only Process Name The name of the process Version The version number of the process Options are Version number A series of numbers...

Page 286: ...tistics Resource usage This status information may be useful for your technical support representative if you have a network problem Depending on the software version running on your switch or your sw...

Page 287: ...0 50 2005 exdos 3 0 0 2 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 50 2005 exfib 1 0 0 2 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 51 2005 exosmc 3 0 0 2 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 50 2005 exosnvram 3 0 0 3 0 Ready Thu Sep 1 17 00 50 2005 e...

Page 288: ...Name PID Path Type Link Date Build By Peer aaa 284 aaa App Thu Dec 4 13 23 07 PST 2003 release manager 2 3 Virtual Router s Configuration Start Priority SchedPolicy Stack TTY CoreSize Heartbeat Start...

Page 289: ...t Forwarding Module exosq EXOS Queue Module exsflow Sflow interface to gather sflow samples exsnoop IGMP MLD Snooping Module exvlan Layer 2 configuration module fdb Forwarding Data Base Manager hal Ha...

Page 290: ...ily of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 290 History This command was first available in an ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The description keyword was...

Page 291: ...on the software version running on your switch and the type of switch you have you can restart different or additional processes To see which processes you can restart enter start process followed by...

Page 292: ...oftware Package in Appendix A Software Upgrade and Boot Options of the ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide Example The following restarts the process tftpd start process tftpd History This command was firs...

Page 293: ...imilar to the following appears Forceful termination success for snmpMaster The graceful option terminates the process by allowing it to close all opened connections notify peers on the network and ot...

Page 294: ...e a process that was installed since the last reboot unless you have saved your configuration If you have installed a software module and you terminate the newly installed process without saving your...

Page 295: ...red for half duplex or full duplex operation The ports are configured to autonegotiate the duplex setting but you can manually configure the duplex setting for your specific needs Flow control is supp...

Page 296: ...or you can configure the display to show a snapshot of real time statistics as in earlier versions of the software Commands that require you to enter one or more port numbers use the parameter port_l...

Page 297: ...s no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines NOTE If you use the clear counters command with no keyword the system clears the counters for all applications This command clears the counters...

Page 298: ...variables Default N A Usage Guidelines This command clears the following counters for LACP it sets these counters back to 0 for every LACP port on the device LACP PDUs dropped on non_LACP ports Stats...

Page 299: ...counters will be cleared for all ports Usage Guidelines This command clears the following counters for EDP protocol data units PDUs sent and received per EDP port Switch PDUs transmitted VLAN PDUs tr...

Page 300: ...ule is reset to default settings If a slot is configured for one type of module and a different type of module is inserted the inserted module is put into a mismatch state where the inserted module do...

Page 301: ...neighbor Extreme Networks switches EDP enabled ports advertise information about the Extreme switch to other switches on the interface and receive advertisements from other Extreme switches Informatio...

Page 302: ...luding 4 bytes used for CRC Both endstations involved in the transfer must be capable of supporting jumbo frames The switch does not perform IP fragmentation or participate in MTU negotiation on behal...

Page 303: ...only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 303 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Ava...

Page 304: ...es 4 bytes of cyclic redundancy check CRC plus another 4 bytes if 802 1Q tagging is being used To enable jumbo frame support you must configure the maximum transmission unit MTU size of a jumbo frame...

Page 305: ...e ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 305 Platform Availability This command is a...

Page 306: ...figure this parameter the lowest numbered ports in the LAG are the first to be added to the aggregator if there are additional ports configured for that LAG they are put in standby mode Use this comma...

Page 307: ...or port can be configured on the switch Frames that contain errors are not mirrored vlan Specifies a VLAN name Specifies a VLAN name port Specifies a port or slot and port port Specifies particular po...

Page 308: ...Summit X450 family of switches only The traffic filter can be defined based on one of the following criteria Physical port All data that traverses the port regardless of VLAN configuration is copied t...

Page 309: ...to the monitor port You can specify which traffic the port mirrors Ingress Mirrors traffic received at the port Egress Mirrors traffic sent from the port Ingress and egress Mirrors all traffic forward...

Page 310: ...n is copied to the monitor port VLAN All data to and from a particular VLAN regardless of the physical port configuration is copied to the monitor port Virtual port All data specific to a VLAN on a sp...

Page 311: ...lan default The following example sends all traffic coming into or out of a BlackDiamond 10808 switch on slot 3 port 2 and the VLAN default to the mirror port configure mirroring add port 3 2 vlan def...

Page 312: ...n Chapter 1 Command Reference Overview Example The following example deletes the mirroring filter on an BlackDiamond 8800 series switch defined for slot 7 port 1 configure mirroring delete ports 7 1 T...

Page 313: ...e ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 313 Platform Availability This command is a...

Page 314: ...itches to either 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps In certain interoperability situations it is necessary to turn autonegotiation off on a fiber gigabit Ethernet port Even though a gigabit Ethernet port runs only at...

Page 315: ...ly the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 315 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform...

Page 316: ...Mbps ports or 802 3z for gigabit Ethernet ports Flow control on gigabit Ethernet ports is enabled or disabled as part of autonegotiation If autonegotiation is set to off flow control is disabled When...

Page 317: ...on the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch formerly known as Aspen When autopolarity is disabled on one or more Ethernet ports you can verify that status by using th...

Page 318: ...5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 318 Platform Availability This command is available only on the...

Page 319: ...to a particular department a common display string The string is displayed in certain commands such as the show ports information command NOTE Do not use a port number as a display string For example...

Page 320: ...red medium to fiber and the fiber link goes away the copper link is not used even if available To display the preferred medium use the show port information detail command you must use the detail vari...

Page 321: ...ackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 321 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Platform Availability This command is available only on...

Page 322: ...and to minimize the network impact of broadcast loops Example The following command rate limits broadcast packets on port 3 on a stand alone switch to 500 pps configure ports 3 rate limit flood broad...

Page 323: ...ly blocked or to be always physically down The default is off or the redundant link is down The following criteria must be considered when configuring a software controlled redundant port You can conf...

Page 324: ...and RX paths fail If a single strand of fiber is pulled on these ports the software redundant port cannot correctly recover from the failure To display the serial number of the module issue the show s...

Page 325: ...based address based L2 L3 L3_L4 lacp Use this command to dynamically add ports to a load sharing group or link aggregation group LAG vMAN ports can belong to LAGs If any port in the LAG is enabled fo...

Page 326: ...unknown unicast packet is transmitted on a single port in the LAG NOTE You cannot configure port based load sharing algorithm on the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch and the Summit X450 family of switc...

Page 327: ...mber of LAGs to 32 04 07 1921 23 52 28 29 Erro HAL Card Error MSM A Slot 8 is not supported when more than 32 load share groups have previously been configured A system reboot is required to clear thi...

Page 328: ...n the load sharing group or LAG to use for forwarding traffic out of the switch Addressing information is based on the packet protocol as follows IP packets Uses the source and destination MAC and IP...

Page 329: ...use the algorithms L2_L3__CHK_SUM and L2_L3_L4_CHK_SUM use the IP check sum as part of the decision for the egress port selection these algorithms do not guarantee the packet sequencing between the cl...

Page 330: ...ynamically delete ports from a load sharing group or link aggregation group LAG This command applies to static and dynamic link aggregation Example The following example deletes port 3 12 from the LAG...

Page 331: ...r to pass traffic If you configure your side in the passive mode ensure that the partner link is in LACP active mode To verify the LACP activity mode use the show lacp lag group id detail command If y...

Page 332: ...5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 332 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS...

Page 333: ...ulted ports in the LAG are always removed from the aggregator this is not configurable If you configure the LAG to add the defaulted port into the aggregator the system takes inventory of the number o...

Page 334: ...the system returns the following error message ERROR LAG group Id does not exist NOTE To force the LACP trunk to behave like a static sharing trunk use this command to add ports to the aggregator Exam...

Page 335: ...ve into the collecting distributing state and exchange traffic That end of the LAG with the lowest system priority is the one that assumes control of the determination If you wish to override the defa...

Page 336: ...ts on a Switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 336 Platform Availability This...

Page 337: ...r to assigning this LACP timeout value To verify the LACP timeout value use the show lacp lag group id detail command If you attempt to enter a port number that is different that a LAG group ID the sy...

Page 338: ...ts on a Switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 338 Platform Availability This...

Page 339: ...default port and VLAN configuration is automatically generated If a slot is configured for one type of module and a different type of module is inserted the inserted module is put into a mismatch sta...

Page 340: ...upports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 340 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10...

Page 341: ...on Default Enabled Usage Guidelines You can use the disable edp ports command to disable EDP on one or more ports when you no longer need to locate neighbor Extreme Networks switches Example The follo...

Page 342: ...mit X450 family of switches do not support enabling or disabling jumbo frames by port BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch only You can enable jumbo frames per ports Example The following command disab...

Page 343: ...purposes Syntax Description Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Use this command in a secure environment where access is granted via permanent forwarding databases FDBs per port Example The following com...

Page 344: ...ables port mirroring Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines Use the disable mirroring command to stop all configured copied mirroring traffic U...

Page 345: ...dministration and troubleshooting purposes When a port is disabled the link is brought down Example The following command disables ports 3 5 and 12 through 15 on a stand alone switch disable ports 3 5...

Page 346: ...the logical port retains all configuration including VLAN membership All other member ports are removed from all VLANs to prevent loops and their configuration is reset to default values Example The f...

Page 347: ...ot still goes to the Disable state If a card is inserted in a slot that has been disabled the card does not come up and stays in the Power Off Disabled state until the slot is enabled by using the ena...

Page 348: ...f switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 348 Example The following command disables slot 5 on the switch disable slot 5 History This command was...

Page 349: ...ncy is disabled the switch attempts only to reset the primary port to active if the redundant port fails That is if you disable Smart Redundancy the traffic does not automatically return to the primar...

Page 350: ...n Extreme Networks switches are attached to a port The EDP is used to locate neighbor Extreme Networks switches and exchange information about switch configuration When running on a normal switch port...

Page 351: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 351 Platform Availability This command is availa...

Page 352: ...mit X450 family of switches only You must enable or disable jumbo frames for the entire switch the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch and the Summit X450 family of switches do not support enabling or dis...

Page 353: ...ly the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 353 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform...

Page 354: ...ist Description Enables MAC address learning on one or more ports Syntax Description Default Enabled Usage Guidelines N A Example The following command enables MAC address learning on slot 1 ports 7 a...

Page 355: ...ELSM and mirroring on the same port If you attempt to enable mirroring on a port that is already enabled for ELSM the switch returns a message similar to the following Error Port mirroring cannot enab...

Page 356: ...d and untagged traffic is mirrored slightly differently depending on the switch that the mirrored port and the monitor port are on With a monitor port on a Summit X450 series switch original Summit X4...

Page 357: ...r e series module the mirrored packet is tagged only if the ingress packet is tagged regardless of what module the ingressing port is on If the packet arrived at the ingress port as untagged the packe...

Page 358: ...or port on the BlackDiamond 8810 switch enable mirroring to port 3 4 The following example selects slot 1 port 3 as the tagged mirror or monitor port on the BlackDiamond 10808 switch enable mirroring...

Page 359: ...if you disabled the port s for security administration or troubleshooting purposes Example The following command enables ports 3 5 and 12 through 15 on the stand alone switch enable ports 3 5 12 15 Th...

Page 360: ...tion group LAG as a single logical port Groups can span multiple modules Beginning with ExtremeWare XOS version 11 3 you can enable and configure dynamic link aggregation using LACP Static link aggreg...

Page 361: ...select the distribution technique used by the LAG to determine the output port selection Algorithm selection is not intended for use in predictive traffic engineering Port based Uses the ingress port...

Page 362: ...ies switch A static LAG can include a maximum of 8 ports An LACP dynamic LAG can include a maximum of 16 ports out of these up to 8 can be selected links and the remaining 8 will be standby links NOTE...

Page 363: ...module will not initialize even if you reduce the number of LAGs to 32 you must reboot the system first The system logs an error message at the error level similar to the following when you must redu...

Page 364: ...port 10 being the logical port enable sharing 10 grouping 10 15 lacp History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The address based algorithm was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 The...

Page 365: ...sabled I O card in the specified slot is brought up and the slot is made operational if possible or goes to the appropriate state as determined by the card state machine The LEDs on the card are broug...

Page 366: ...of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 366 Example The following command enables slot 5 on the switch enable slot 5 History This command was f...

Page 367: ...The Smart Redundancy feature works in concert with the software controlled redundant port feature With Smart Redundancy enabled on the switch when the primary port becomes active the switch redirects...

Page 368: ...on Resets autonegotiation for one or more ports by resetting the physical link Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines N A Example The following command resets autonegotiation on slot 1 port 4...

Page 369: ...Sync the two MSMs are in sync If the MSMs are not in sync and both MSMs are running ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 or later use the synchronize command to get the two MSMs in sync This command ensures that the...

Page 370: ...n a Switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 370 Platform Availability This com...

Page 371: ...e clear lacp counters command The neighbor ID value is eight bytes The first two bytes are always set to 00 00 the last six bytes are set to the neighbor s system MAC address Use the show edp command...

Page 372: ...u rx 2511 pdu rx err 0 Time of last transmit error None Time of last receive error None Remote System Oban Age 41 Remote ID 00 00 00 30 48 41 ed 97 Software version 11 1 0 19 Remote Port 1 1 Port Type...

Page 373: ...P priority in the absence of a specifically configured priority LACP PDUs dropped on non LACP ports LAG Identifies the particular LAG This number comes from logical port assigned to the LAG and is the...

Page 374: ...ifies the number of ports added to the aggregator for that LAG Example The following command displays the LACP LAGs on the switch show lacp The following is sample output from this command on a modula...

Page 375: ...P bulk checkpointed messages sent LACP bulk checkpointed messages received LACP PDUs checkpointed sent LACP PDUs checkpointed received LAG group ID Member port Packets received Packets dropped from PD...

Page 376: ...6 Lag Member Rx Rx Drop Rx Drop Rx Drop Tx Tx Group Port Ok PDU Err Not Up Same MAC Sent Ok Xmit Err 1 1 1 1 2169 0 0 0 2170 0 1 2 2169 0 0 0 2170 0 1 3 2169 0 0 0 2170 0 1 4 2169 0 0 0 2170 0 1 5 216...

Page 377: ...u are working on is the controlling partner in the LAG Actor Key Automatically generated LACP key Partner MAC Identifies the MAC address for the system connecting to the LAG on the remote end Partner...

Page 378: ...nto selected mode if one of the currently selected ports in the LAG goes down Mux State Ability to transmit and collect data of the port Waiting Selected port that is waiting for LACP to determine if...

Page 379: ...nt Standby Detached A G 4012 4 29 200 Current Selected Collect Dist A GSCD 4029 4 30 0 Current Selected Collect Dist A GSCD 4030 4 31 202 Current Selected Collect Dist A GSCD 4031 4 32 203 Current Sel...

Page 380: ...lected Collect Dist A GSCD 4010 4 11 302 Current Standby Detached A G 4011 4 12 303 Current Standby Detached A G 4012 4 29 200 Current Selected Collect Dist A GSCD 4029 4 30 0 Current Selected Collect...

Page 381: ...e Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 381 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 3 Platform Avai...

Page 382: ...LACP PDUs Expired Defaulted Sel Logic Selection state of the port Selected Ports with a matching admin key on the remote end Unselected Ports that failed to meet with a matching admin key on the remo...

Page 383: ...Ready_N Ready to be added to aggregator Wait pending Ack pending LAG Id S Displays information on controlling partner of LAG T Displays information on controlled partner of LAG Stats Rx Accepted Rx Dr...

Page 384: ...st A GSCD 4009 Up Yes Enabled Yes Link State Up Actor Churn False Partner Churn False Ready_N Yes Wait pending No Ack pending No LAG Id S pri 2110 S id 00 01 30 f9 9c 30 K 0x0fa9 P pri 300 P num 4009...

Page 385: ...roring You can use this command to display mirroring statistics and determine if mirroring is enabled or disabled on the switch Example The following command displays switch mirroring statistics show...

Page 386: ...ackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch only Following is sample output from this command on the BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch that is configured for port based mirroring Mirror port 1 5 is up tagged...

Page 387: ...of the data at the time you issue the command This status information may be useful for your technical support representative if you have a network problem Example The following command displays real...

Page 388: ...e BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 388 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The Not Present variable was added in ExtremeWare XO...

Page 389: ...the no refresh parameter the system displays a snapshot of the data at the time you issue the command This status information may be useful for your technical support representative if you have a net...

Page 390: ...TP 5 3 VR Default E R ON AUTO AUTO UTP 5 4 VR Default E R ON AUTO AUTO UTP 5 5 VR Default E R ON AUTO AUTO UTP 5 6 VR Default E R ON AUTO AUTO UTP 5 7 VR Default E R ON AUTO AUTO UTP 5 8 VR Default E...

Page 391: ...ies switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 391 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The Port not present and Media variables were added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2...

Page 392: ...This command displays information including the following Port number Port configuration Virtual router Type of port Admin state Link state and speed Link counter VLAN configuration STP configuration...

Page 393: ...filter up indicates the number of link transitions from down to up at the middle layer filter Example The following command displays port system related information on a BlackDiamond 8810 switch show...

Page 394: ...D State FORWARDING Protocol Name Default Protocol ANY Match all protocols Trunking Load sharing is not enabled EDP Enabled ELSM Enabled Learning Enabled Unicast Flooding Enabled Multicast Flooding Ena...

Page 395: ...led Jumbo Disabled QoS Profile None configured Aggregate Queue QP0 MinBw 0 PR 100K Pri 8 Queue QP1 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 1 QP2 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 2 QP3 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 3 QP4 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100...

Page 396: ...VLAN cfg Name Default Internal Tag 1 MAC limit No limit Virtual ro uter VR Default STP cfg s0 disable Tag none Mode 802 1D State FORWARDING Protocol Name Default Protocol ANY Match all protocols Trun...

Page 397: ...ich medium the specified port is using History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Information on ingress rate shaping was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 NetLogIn Smart Redundancy...

Page 398: ...you issue the command To clear the counters use the clear counters ports command This status information may be useful for your technical support representative if you have a network problem The follo...

Page 399: ...0 0 0 0 5 5 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 6 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 7 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 8 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Link Status A Active R Ready NP Port not present History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10...

Page 400: ...about redundant ports Syntax This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays information on software controlled redundant ports on t...

Page 401: ...LACP it is the aggregation control for the specified LAG Ld Share Algorithm The algorithm used for the link aggregation The available link aggregation algorithms vary among platforms see the ExtremeW...

Page 402: ...9 A 3 L2 10 A 3 12 Static L2 12 R 0 L2 13 R 0 Link Status A Active D Disabled R Ready NP Port not present Load Sharing Algorithm L2 Layer 2 address based L3 Layer 3 address based Default algorithm L2...

Page 403: ...the real time displayed information for packets bytes and bandwidth in that order When you use a parameter packets byte or bandwidth with the command the display for the specified type shows a snapsho...

Page 404: ...16 R 0 0 0 0 17 R 0 0 0 0 Link Status A Active R Ready NP Port Not Present Spacebar toggle screen U page up D page down ESC exit NOTE Use the spacebar to toggle this real time display for all ports f...

Page 405: ...k Receive Peak Rx Transmit Peak Transmit Status bytes sec bytes sec bytes sec bytes sec 1 A 0 0 0 0 2 R 0 0 0 0 3 R 0 0 0 0 4 R 0 0 0 0 5 R 0 0 0 0 6 R 0 0 0 0 7 R 0 0 0 0 8 R 0 0 0 0 9 R 0 0 0 0 10 R...

Page 406: ...0 0 0 9 R 0 0 0 0 10 R 0 0 0 0 11 R 0 0 0 0 12 R 0 0 0 0 13 R 0 0 0 0 14 R 0 0 0 0 15 R 0 0 0 0 16 R 0 0 0 0 17 R 0 0 0 0 18 R 0 0 0 0 19 R 0 0 0 0 20 R 0 0 0 0 21 R 0 0 0 0 22 R 0 0 0 0 23 R 0 0 0 0...

Page 407: ...dule is configured as The state of the module whether the power is down if the module is operational if a diagnostic being run if there is a mismatch between the slot configuration and the module in t...

Page 408: ...G48P Operational 48 M S Slot 9 10G4X 10G4X Powered OFF 4 SI Slot 10 Empty 0 MSM A MSM G8X Operational 0 S MSM B Empty 0 Flags M Backplane link to Master MSM is Active B Backplane link to Backup MSM i...

Page 409: ...e action initiated The following example displays module information for a specified slot on the BlackDiamond 10808 switch BD 10808 3 show slot 7 Slot 7 information State Operationa Download 100 Flags...

Page 410: ...Last Error Insufficient power Serial number 804406 00 02 0511F 00605 Hw Module Type 10G2H Configured Type Ports available 42 Slot 3 information State Powered OFF Download 0 Flags I Last Error Insuffi...

Page 411: ...00 09 0434F 00125 Hw Module Type MSM 1XL SW Version 11 4 0 26 Configured Type Ports available 0 MSM B information State Operational Download 100 Flags S Last Error Lost Connectivity to MSM Serial num...

Page 412: ...isplay string from one or more ports Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command removes the display string that you configured using the configure ports display string command Exampl...

Page 413: ...redundant port Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines The list of port numbers or the port display string specifies the primary port s Example The following command unconfigures a software c...

Page 414: ...re slot command on a slot containing a module with any ports configured for software controlled redundancy this command wipes away all software controlled redundancy on both ports both ports return to...

Page 415: ...ailures in virtual bridged LANs Part of this specification is a toolset to manually check connectivity which is sometimes referred to as Layer 2 ping NOTE The ExtremeWare XOS implementation of CFM is...

Page 416: ...ociation or MA You add the MA or association to the domain and the MA uses the MA level assigned to the domain Each MA can belong to only one domain but several MAs can belong to a given domain The MA...

Page 417: ...le association or MA You add the MA or association to the domain and the MA uses the MA level assigned to the domain Each MA can belong to only one domain but several MAs can belong to a given domain...

Page 418: ...igned to the domain Each MA can belong to only one domain but several MAs can belong to a given domain The MA is unique within a given domain Example The following command creates an MA with the VPN I...

Page 419: ...rd facing MEP or the CCM messages go in the wrong direction These ports must already be in the MA VLAN prior to assigning a MEP function to them If you try to assign a port not in the MA as an end poi...

Page 420: ...hin an MA inward facing MEP and MIP inward facing MEP and outward facing MEP outward facing MEP and MIP You can configure a total of 32 inward facing MEPs and 32 outward facing MEPs on a single switch...

Page 421: ...m If you try to assign a port not in the MA as an end point the system returns the following message The following port s portlist are not part of the associations VLAN NOTE If you configured MAC in M...

Page 422: ...Ware XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 422 Platform Availability This command is available...

Page 423: ...prior to assigning a MEP function to them If you try to assign a port not in the MA as an end point the system returns the following message The following port s portlist are not part of the associati...

Page 424: ...5 Command Reference Guide 424 Example The following command configures port 1 20 as a MIP on the 350 association in the spain domain configure cfm domain spain association 350 ports 1 20 add intermedi...

Page 425: ...the show cfm command to verify your configuration Example The following command deletes port 5 10 as the inward facing MEP on the test association in the brazil domain configure cfm domain brazil asso...

Page 426: ...Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete a CFF Use the show cfm command to verify your configuration Example The following command deletes port 1 40 as a CFF on the test association in the spain do...

Page 427: ...Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete an MIP Use the show cfm command to verify your configuration Example The following command deletes port 5 12 as an MIP on the test association i...

Page 428: ...MEP or the incorrectly facing MEP the system returns an error message Use the show cfm command to verify your configuration Example The following command changes the MEP ID to 75 on the previously con...

Page 429: ...emeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 429 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 430: ...on a port that is either not an MEP or the incorrectly facing MEP the system returns a message NOTE Extreme Networks recommends that you use a transmit interval of at least 1 second 1000 ms The syste...

Page 431: ...ing command changes the interval the inward facing MEP previously configured on port 2 4 uses to send CCM messages on the 350 association in the finance domain to 2 seconds configure cfm domain financ...

Page 432: ...ge Guidelines When you delete an association or MA you also remove all its configured values from the switch These values include all configured MEPs MIPs and CFFs Example The following command delete...

Page 433: ...one a switch The IEEE standard 801 2ag specifies different levels for different network users as follows 0 to 2 for end users 3 and 4 for Internet service providers ISPs 5 to 7 for operators entities...

Page 434: ...with the lowest number being superior in the hierarchy The IEEE standard 801 2ag specifies different levels for different network users as follows 0 to 2 for end users 3 and 4 for Internet service pr...

Page 435: ...g CFM messages The levels are from 0 to 7 with the lowest number being superior in the hierarchy The IEEE standard 801 2ag specifies different levels for different network users as follows 0 to 2 for...

Page 436: ...Ware XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 436 Platform Availability This command is available...

Page 437: ...messages The levels are from 0 to 7 with the lowest number being superior in the hierarchy The IEEE standard 801 2ag specifies different levels for different network users as follows 0 to 2 for end u...

Page 438: ...Ware XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 438 Platform Availability This command is available...

Page 439: ...the lowest number being superior in the hierarchy The IEEE standard 801 2ag specifies different levels for different network users as follows 0 to 2 for end users 3 and 4 for Internet service provider...

Page 440: ...Ware XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 440 Platform Availability This command is available...

Page 441: ...messages The levels are from 0 to 7 with the lowest number being superior in the hierarchy The IEEE standard 801 2ag specifies different levels for different network users as follows 0 to 2 for end u...

Page 442: ...Ware XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 442 Platform Availability This command is available...

Page 443: ...his MD Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command deletes all configuration settings related to the domain for example all MAs MIPs MEPs and CFFs as well as the domain itself Example...

Page 444: ...nation MP responds back to the originator with a loopback reply LBR This command sends out a ping from the MEP configured on the specified port toward the specified MAC address If you attempt to send...

Page 445: ...e output from the Layer 2 ping command BD 10808 24 ping mac 00 30 48 42 F1 68 port 1 1 dnsname short ma name Send L2 Ping inwards from 1 1 waiting for responses press Ctrl C to abort 49 bytes from 00...

Page 446: ...rd facing MEPs MEPIDs MEP transmit intervals Outward facing MEPs Intermediate points MIPs Total number of CFM ports on the switch See Supported Instances for CFM for the number of domains ports MEPs M...

Page 447: ...0808 5 show cfm Domain m1400name MA Level 0 Domain isoname MA Level 1 Domain dnsname MA Level 2 Association short ma name VLAN one with 4 cfm ports port 1 1 Inward facing End Point mepid 12 transmit i...

Page 448: ...The name of the domain and association Port number MP and type MAC address of remote end points MEP IDs Lifetime for CCM messages from each remote end point Actual age of CCM messages NOTE The TTL fo...

Page 449: ...e Association MAC Address ID time Age dnsname short ma name 1 1 IE 00 30 48 42 f3 12 43 3500 770 1 1 IE 00 30 48 42 f1 68 69 3500 380 2 1 IE 00 30 48 42 f3 12 12 3500 570 2 1 IE 00 30 48 42 f1 68 69 3...

Page 450: ...ured on the specified port A CCM is forwarded when the embedded MA level is numerically equal to or lower than the configured MA level on the switch that is a domain configured with an MA level of 5 f...

Page 451: ...l_out dnsname short ma name 2 1 IE 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 OE 0 0 0 2 2 FF 396 0 Maintenance Point IE Inward Facing End Point I Intermediate Point OE Outward Facing End Point FF Filter Function NOTE The Domain...

Page 452: ...ard facing end point keyword After you issue the command the system prints out the route the LTM message took Each MIP along the route passes the LTM along only in the direction of the path and sends...

Page 453: ...a association 350 The following is sample output from this command TTL CFM Source MAC Reply Reply Ingress Reply Egress 63 00 30 48 42 f3 12 F f 00 30 48 42 f3 12 o 62 00 30 48 42 f1 68 nu 00 30 48 42...

Page 454: ...ommands for Connectivity Fault Management ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 454...

Page 455: ...agents also receive link layer control frames extract the information in TLVs and store them in LLDP MIB objects You configure LLDP per port and each port can store received information for a maximum...

Page 456: ...cond The fast start feature enables the MED capable device to quickly learn information this command changes the value from the default 3 The fast start feature is automatically enabled when you enabl...

Page 457: ...ement address TLV per LLDPDU and the information must be the IP address configured on the management VLAN If no IP address is assigned to the management VLAN the system sends the system MAC address LL...

Page 458: ...on to its neighbors Syntax Description Default No advertise Usage Guidelines N A Example The following command configures port 1 7 to not advertise the port description information to neighbors config...

Page 459: ...t least one VLAN exists with more than two ports bridging is sent to enabled When at least one VLAN on the switch has IP forwarding enabled the system automatically sets the router bit Example The fol...

Page 460: ...when you enable LLDP When enabled the system sends the following image from the show version command in the system description TLV ExtremeWare XOS version 11 2 0 12 v1120b12 by release manager on Fri...

Page 461: ...m name to its neighbors Syntax Description Default No advertise Usage Guidelines N A Example The following command configures port 1 6 to advertise the system name to neighbors configure lldp ports 1...

Page 462: ...iption Default No advertise Usage Guidelines The Avaya phone uses this proprietary LLDP TLV for addressing information You can configure the IP address for up to 8 call servers in a single TLV Example...

Page 463: ...s vendor specific med capabilities command Enable the LLDP MED network policy TLV using the configure lldp ports vendor specific med policy application command This TLV is used to exchange information...

Page 464: ...d by the LLDP MED network policy TLV as configured by the configure lldp ports vendor specific med policy application command Uses the priority tagged frames configured by the phone s server Sends the...

Page 465: ...fault No advertise Usage Guidelines The Avaya phone uses this proprietary LLDP TLV for addressing information You can configure the IP address for up to 4 file servers in a single TLV Example The foll...

Page 466: ...onservation level or request the PD to go to the maximum conservation level This LLDP TLV is transmitted only on PoE capable ports When configured to advertise the switch sends this TLV with a request...

Page 467: ...poe conservation request ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 467 Platform Availa...

Page 468: ...se Usage Guidelines The port VLAN ID TLV allows the port to transmit the VLAN ID associated with untagged VLANs There can be only one port VLAN ID in each LLPDU If no untagged VLANs are configured on...

Page 469: ...ociated tagged values A separate TLV is sent for each VLAN that you want to advertise By default once you configure this TLV the system sends all protocol based VLANs on the port However the LLDPDU ca...

Page 470: ...Reference Guide 470 Example The following command configures all ports to advertise port and protocol VLAN information to neighbors for all VLANs on all ports configure lldp ports all advertise vendo...

Page 471: ...AN station to advertise the assigned name of any VLAN with which it is configured You can enable this TLV for tagged and untagged VLANs When you enable this TLV for tagged VLANs the TLV advertises the...

Page 472: ...meWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 472 Example The following command configures all ports to not advertise VLAN name information to neighbors configure lldp ports all no advertise vendor specific...

Page 473: ...tise Usage Guidelines When configured this TLV is added to each LLDP port LLDPDU indicating the link aggregation capabilities status and value of the master port of the load sharing group Example The...

Page 474: ...ax Description Default No advertise Usage Guidelines When configured the system add information about the speed capabilities as well as autonegotiation support and status of the LLDP port Example The...

Page 475: ...jumbo frames are not enabled on the specified port the TLV reports a value of 1518 once you configure it to advertise If jumbo frames are enabled the TLV inserts the configured value for the jumbo fra...

Page 476: ...cription Default No advertise Usage Guidelines When configured the system includes this TLV Extreme Networks recommends enabling this TLV only on PoE capable ports The following information is transmi...

Page 477: ...E For more information on advertising power support see the configure lldp ports vendor specific med power via mdi command Example The following command configures all ports to advertise power capabil...

Page 478: ...to This TLV must be enabled before any of the other MED TLVs can be enabled and this TLV must be set to no advertise after all other MED TLVs are set to no advertise As with all the LLDP MED TLVs the...

Page 479: ...ries switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 479 Example The following command configures all ports to advertise MED capabilities to neighbors configure lldp ports all advertise vendor spe...

Page 480: ...command all Specifies all ports on the switch port_list Specifies one or more ports or slots and ports advertise Specifies to send the information to neighbors advertise Specifies to send the informat...

Page 481: ...apable device on the port The switch does not automatically send this TLV after it is enabled the switch must first detect a MED capable device on the port Example The following command configures all...

Page 482: ...on to neighbors no advertise Specifies not to send the information to neighbors advertise Specifies to send the information to neighbors voice Specifies voice application on specified port VLAN s voic...

Page 483: ...lldp ports all port_list advertise no advertise vendor specific med capabilities command As with all the LLDP MED TLVs the switch sends this TLV only after it detects a MED capable device on the port...

Page 484: ...only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 484 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Platf...

Page 485: ...itch returns an error message if this TLV is configured for a non PoE capable port You must configure the LLDP MED capabilities TLV before configuring this TLV Configure the LLDP MED capabilities TLV...

Page 486: ...wer priority Taken from PoE port configuration Power value Taken from PoE port configuration Example The following command configures all ports to advertise MED power information to neighbors configur...

Page 487: ...before the receive state machine is reinstalled once the LLDP transmit mode has been disabled Syntax Description Default 2 seconds Usage Guidelines N A Example The following command configures a rein...

Page 488: ...notifications are sent Syntax Description Default 5 seconds Usage Guidelines This is a global timer If one port sends a notification no notifications for other ports go out for the configured interval...

Page 489: ...The auto option uses a formula 0 25 transmit interval to calculate the number of seconds Syntax Description Default 2 seconds Usage Guidelines This is the timer between triggered updates Example The f...

Page 490: ...ed in the LLDPDU messages The formula is transmit interval transmit hold by default the TTL value is 30 4 120 seconds Syntax Description Default 4 Usage Guidelines N A Example The following command co...

Page 491: ...Description Configures the periodic transmittal interval for LLDPDUs Syntax Description Default 30 seconds Usage Guidelines N A Example The following command configures a transmittal interval of 20 s...

Page 492: ...ault Disabled Usage Guidelines If you do not specify an option both LLDP modes transmit and receive are disabled Example The following example disables the LLDP receive mode on ports 1 2 to 1 6 disabl...

Page 493: ...e specified port or ports Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If you do not specify any ports the system stops sending LLDP traps from all ports on the switch Example The following ex...

Page 494: ...the specified port or ports Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If you do not specify any ports the system stops sending LLDP MED traps from all ports on the switch Example The follo...

Page 495: ...mode that second mode replaces the original mode For example you may originally enable several ports to only receive LLDP messages and then want those ports to both receive and transmit LLDP messages...

Page 496: ...enable SNMP traps for LLDP MED TLVs you must issue a separate command use the enable snmp traps lldp med ports all port_list If you do not specify any ports the system sends LLDP traps for all ports...

Page 497: ...notifications related to LLDP MED extension TLVs Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If you do not specify any ports the system sends LLDP MED traps for all ports Example The followi...

Page 498: ...e displays LLDP configuration information for the switch show lldp LLDP transmit interval 30 seconds LLDP transmit hold multiplier 4 used TTL 120 seconds LLDP transmit delay 2 seconds LLDP SNMP notifi...

Page 499: ...ration Port Rx Tx SNMP Optional enabled transmit TLVs Mode Mode Notification LLDP 802 1 802 3 MED AvEx 1 1 Enabled Enabled D CLP VLAN Default VLAN voice AvEx Call Server IP Address es 10 0 0 20 10 0 0...

Page 500: ...DP ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 500 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 501: ...or information for all switch ports show lldp port all neighbors Port Neighbor Chassis ID Neighbor Port ID TTL Age 4 1 00 04 96 10 51 81 1 69 120 29 4 1 00 30 48 42 F3 12 1 1 120 1 4 2 00 04 96 10 51...

Page 502: ...e File Server s 12 0 0 1 Avaya Extreme IEEE 802 1q Framing Tagged Avaya Extreme CNA Server 13 0 0 1 Avaya Extreme IP Phone Address 10 116 3 10 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Address 10 116 3 1 MED Capa...

Page 503: ...tremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 503 Platform Availability This command is avail...

Page 504: ...ber of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular neighbor could not be stored in memory because of insufficient resources Number of table age outs The number of times the comple...

Page 505: ...t recognized by the switch Example The following example lists statistical counters for all ports on the switch show lldp port all statistics Last table change time Fri Dec 17 10 42 33 2004 Number of...

Page 506: ...DP timers are reset to default values All the configured TLVs remain on the ports remain and LLDP remains enabled When you use the keyword ports the TLVs for each port are returned to the five default...

Page 507: ...Networks devices that support PoE and the minimum required software G48P module for the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 and higher G48Pe module for the BlackDiamond 8800 series s...

Page 508: ...istics for ports 1 8 on slot 3 on a modular switch clear inline power stats ports 3 1 3 8 The following command displays cleared inline power configuration information for ports 1 8 in slot 3 show inl...

Page 509: ...it X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 509 Platform Availability This command is available on the G48P and G48Pe modules instal...

Page 510: ...ower priority ports for information on configuring this parameter If you attempt to configure this power budget for a value that the system cannot safely provide the system returns an error message To...

Page 511: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 511 Example The following command sets the power for slot 4 to 150 W configure inline power budget 150 slot 4 History This command was first available in Ex...

Page 512: ...ts power on that slot regardless of the priority or to disconnect those PDs on ports with lower priorities until there is enough power for the new PD If you select this argument and you did not config...

Page 513: ...mily of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 513 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Platform Availability This co...

Page 514: ...or each port show inline power configuration port 3 1 10 Following is sample output from this command Port Config Operator Limit Priority Label 3 1 Enabled 16000 mW Low finance 3 2 Enabled 15000 mW Lo...

Page 515: ...mmit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 515 Platform Availability This command is available on the G48P and G48Pe modules inst...

Page 516: ...om that port and the port moves into a fault state If you try to set an operator limit outside the accepted range the system returns the following error message Error Invalid operator limit value Must...

Page 517: ...st priority then newly detected PDs will be powered if that port has higher priority than the existing powered ports If there are multiple ports at the same priority level either configured or by defa...

Page 518: ...ed threshold value initiates the event and message once that percentage of the budgeted power is being used On a modular switch the PoE threshold applies only to the percentage per slot of measured to...

Page 519: ...s By default inline power provided to all ports is enabled NOTE Disabling inline power using the disable inline power command does not affect the data traffic traversing the port And disabling the por...

Page 520: ...t X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 520 Platform Availability This command is available on the G48P and G48Pe modules install...

Page 521: ...cted by the switch through a capacitance measurement However measuring the power through capacitance is used only if this parameter is enabled and after an unsuccessful attempt to discover the PD usin...

Page 522: ...rough capacitance is used only if this parameter is enabled and after an unsuccessful attempt to discover the PD using the standard resistance measurement method The default for legacy is disabled The...

Page 523: ...ling inline power using the disable inline power command does not affect the data traffic traversing the port And disabling the port using the disable port command does not affect the inline power sup...

Page 524: ...t X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 524 Platform Availability This command is available on the G48P and G48Pe modules install...

Page 525: ...ovide inline power to a slot is enabled Disabling a slot using this command does not change the power budgeted to a specified slot using the configure inline power budget slot command nor can that pow...

Page 526: ...itch if your chassis has an inline power module and there is not enough power to supply a slot that slot will not be powered on the slot will not function in data only mode without enough power for in...

Page 527: ...eference Guide 527 Example The following command enables inline power currently provided to all ports and all slots enable inline power History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1...

Page 528: ...E 802 3af standard but may be detected by the switch through a capacitance measurement However measuring the power through capacitance is used only if this parameter is enabled and after an unsuccessf...

Page 529: ...wever measuring the power through capacitance is used only if this parameter is enabled and after an unsuccessful attempt to discover the PD using the standard resistance measurement method The defaul...

Page 530: ...ine power budget slot command If you do not have enough reserved power for the port that port moves into a Denied state NOTE On modular switches if your chassis has an inline power module and there is...

Page 531: ...X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 531 Platform Availability This command is available on the G48P and G48Pe modules installed...

Page 532: ...fault each PoE module has 50 W of power reserved for inline power NOTE If your chassis has an inline power module and there is not enough power to supply a slot that slot will not be powered on the sl...

Page 533: ...mediately disabled and then re enabled allowing remote PDs to be power cycled This command affects only inline power it does not affect network connectivity for the port s Example The following comman...

Page 534: ...eting if one power supply is lost System power usage threshold The configured power usage threshold for each slot shown as a percentage of budgeted power Once this threshold has been passed on any slo...

Page 535: ...le The following command displays inline power status for the system show inline power Following is sample output from this command on a modular switch Inline Power System Information Configured Enabl...

Page 536: ...led The port cannot provide inline power Operator Limit Displays the configured limit in milliwatts for inline power on the port Label Displays a text string if any associated with the port The follow...

Page 537: ...and Reference Guide 537 3 6 Enabled 15000 mW Low 3 7 Enabled 15000 mW Low 3 8 Enabled 15000 mW Low 3 9 Enabled 15000 mW Low 3 10 Enabled 15000 mW Low History This command was first available in Extrem...

Page 538: ...earching state as the hardware retests the PD state You can use this command to generate a summary report or a detailed report Summary output displays the following inline power information for the sp...

Page 539: ...etail output displays the following information Configured Admin State Displays the port s configured state Enabled or Disabled Inline Power State Displays the port power state MIB Detect Status Displ...

Page 540: ...1 delivering class3 48 3 192 9 300 None 3 2 delivering class3 48 3 192 9 300 None 3 3 searching 0 0 0 0 0 None The following command displays detail inline power information for port 1 on slot 3 show...

Page 541: ...he status conditions are Enabled Disabled Power usage threshold Firmware status The operational status of the slot The status conditions are Operational Not operational Disabled Subsystem failure Meas...

Page 542: ...e Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 542 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Platform Avai...

Page 543: ...onditions are Enabled Disabled Firmware status The operational status of the slot The status conditions are Operational Not operational Disabled Subsystem failure Card not present Slot disabled Budget...

Page 544: ...switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 544 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 545: ...owered and waiting for power for the switch Unlike the values displayed with the show inline power stats ports command these values displayed with the show inline power stats command are current readi...

Page 546: ...ays the port power state Disabled Searching Delivering Faulted Disconnected Other Denied PD s power class Displays the class type of the connected PD disabled or searching class0 class 0 device class1...

Page 547: ...CS COUNTERS Port State Class Absent InvSig Denied OverCurrent Short 3 1 delivering class3 0 0 0 18 0 3 2 delivering class3 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 searching class0 0 0 0 0 0 3 4 searching class0 0 0 0 0 0 3 5 s...

Page 548: ...ulted powered and waiting for power for the selected slots Unlike the values displayed with the show inline power stats ports command these values displayed with the show inline power stats slot comma...

Page 549: ...s only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 549 Platform Availability This command is available on the G48P and G48Pe...

Page 550: ...specified slot and resets the budgeted power reserved for all PDs connected to this slot to 50 W The rest of the previously configured power budget on this slot cannot be used to power other slots or...

Page 551: ...meter for the entire modular switch you cannot configure this per slot or per port Unconfigures the PoE disconnect precedence previously set for the modular switch and returns the disconnect precedenc...

Page 552: ...ription Default 15400 mW Usage Guidelines This command unconfigures any previously configured operator limit for the specified ports It resets the maximum power that any PD can draw to 15400 mW Exampl...

Page 553: ...ult value of low If there are multiple ports on a modular switch at the same priority level either configured or by default and one of the ports must have power withdrawn because of excessive power de...

Page 554: ...for to 70 The system initiates an event and message once that percentage of the budgeted power is being used On stand alone switches this PoE threshold applies to the entire switch On modular switche...

Page 555: ...ty level Critical A desired switch function is inoperable The switch may need to be reset Error A problem is interfering with normal operation Warning An abnormal condition exists that may lead to a f...

Page 556: ...isolates the connections to the faulty switch from the rest of the network If the switch fabric sends packets during a CPU failure the switch may appear healthy when it is not For example if hardware...

Page 557: ...upports sFlow NOTE If you have a Summit X450e series switch you must upgrade to an Advanced Edge license to configure and use the sFlow features described in this chapter For more information about so...

Page 558: ...s Monitoring and Statistics ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 558 probeResetCon...

Page 559: ...e clear counters command If you specify an option the switch only clears the statistics for that option For example if you want to clear reset only the STP statistics and counters use the clear counte...

Page 560: ...elsm ports portlist auto restart command to transition a port from the Down Stuck state to the Down state For information about the ELSM enabled ports states see the command show elsm ports on page 66...

Page 561: ...mmand Use this command to clear only the ELSM related counters To clear all of the counters on the switch including those related to ELSM use the clear counters command Viewing and maintaining statist...

Page 562: ...target the clear log static and clear log messages nvram commands remove messages from the NVRAM target In addition the clear log static command will also clear the memory buffer target There are thre...

Page 563: ...page 668 for more information about severity levels To get a listing of the event conditions in the system use the following command show log events detail To get a listing of the components present...

Page 564: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 564 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10...

Page 565: ...following command clear sys recovery level The switch prompts you to confirm this action The following is a sample confirmation message Are you sure you want to clear sys recovery level y n Enter y to...

Page 566: ...more slots of a modular switch or the entire stand alone switch is shut down as a result of your hardware recovery configuration and a switch error The following is sample truncated output of the comm...

Page 567: ...hello transmit states The hello transmit states display the current state of transmitted ELSM hello messages For more information about the hello transmit states see the show elsm ports command A hig...

Page 568: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 568 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11...

Page 569: ...ne Hello message to transition from the Down Wait state to the Up state After the down timer expires the port checks the number of Hello messages against the hold threshold If the number of Hello mess...

Page 570: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 570 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11...

Page 571: ...higher more critical Severities include critical error warning info notice debug summary debug verbose and debug data You can also control log data to different targets The command equivalent to conf...

Page 572: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 572 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10...

Page 573: ...this filter The new filter item either includes the events specified or if the exclude keyword is present excludes the events specified The delete keyword is used to remove events from the filter item...

Page 574: ...ecified as the component and no severity is specified then only messages with severity of warning and greater would be passed since the threshold severity for the STP InPBDU subcomponent is warning Us...

Page 575: ...filter use the following command show log configuration filter filter name Example The following command adds all STP component events at severity info to the filter mySTPFilter configure log filter...

Page 576: ...hing specified event parameter values to the event See the configure log filter events command on page 573 for more information on specifying and using filters on event conditions and components and o...

Page 577: ...XOS 11 2 you can specify the ipaddress type as IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the IP version The following examples show how to configure IPv4 addresses and IPv6 addresses IPv4 address To configure an IP a...

Page 578: ...xpression Match Versus Strict Match The match and strict match keywords control the filter behavior for incidents whose event definition does not contain all the parameters specified in a configure lo...

Page 579: ...f severity critical error warning notice and info For any of these events containing a physical port number as a match parameter limit the incidents to only those occurring on physical ports 3 4 and 5...

Page 580: ...console display memory buffer Specifies the switch memory buffer primary msm Specifies the primary MSM NOTE This parameter is available only on modular switches backup msm Specifies the backup MSM NO...

Page 581: ...t filter command and specify the target as session Use the following form of the command for per session configuration changes configure log target session filter filter name severity severity only Co...

Page 582: ...y warning and above configure log target syslog 10 31 8 25 8993 local3 filter myFilter severity warning The following command sends log messages to the current session that pass the filter myFilter an...

Page 583: ...all Specifies all remote syslog servers ipaddress Specifies the syslog IP address ipPort Specifies the UDP port number for the syslog target vr_name Specifies the virtual router that can reach the se...

Page 584: ...nd the Summit X450 family of switches do not support user created VRs This command configures the format of the items that make up log messages You can choose to include or exclude items and set the f...

Page 585: ...ose and Debug Data Event Names Event names can be output as the component name only by specifying event name component and as component and subcomponent name with condition mnemonic by specifying even...

Page 586: ...ion format timestamp seconds date mm dd yyyy event name component The same example would appear as 05 29 2005 12 16 36 Warn SNTP The SNTP server parameter value TheWrongServer example com can not be r...

Page 587: ...t has been enabled the message passes the console Specifies the console display memory buffer Specifies the switch memory buffer nvram Specifies the switch NVRAM primary msm Specifies the primary MSM...

Page 588: ...be sent that has satisfied all of the other requirements To see the configuration of a target use the following command show log configuration target console memory buffer nvram primary msm backup msm...

Page 589: ...VR Mgmt is used console Specifies the console display memory buffer Specifies the switch memory buffer nvram Specifies the switch NVRAM primary msm Specifies the primary MSM NOTE This parameter is ava...

Page 590: ...the command show log on page 668 for a detailed description of severity levels To see the current configuration of a target use the following command show log configuration target console memory buffe...

Page 591: ...ver s IP address By configuring a source IP address the syslog server can identify from which switch it received the log message Options for configuring the remote syslog server include all Specifies...

Page 592: ...re a source IP address for the syslog target the switch uses the IP address in the configured VR that has the closed route to the destination Example The following command configures the IP address fo...

Page 593: ...identify the switch in the network management tools that you use The agent address is stored in the payload of the sFlow data and is used by the sFlow collector to identify each agent uniquely The de...

Page 594: ...IP address for the sFlow data collector and you may specify a particular UDP port if your collector uses a non standard port You may also need to specify from which virtual router to send the data Yo...

Page 595: ...ly of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 595 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Availability This comm...

Page 596: ...igure sflow ports portlist sample rate number command is doubled on the slot modular switch or ports stand alone switch on which maximum number of packets were received during the last snapshot This e...

Page 597: ...upports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 597 Platform Availability This command is available on all platform...

Page 598: ...the polling interval To manage CPU load polling for sFlow enabled ports are distributed over the polling interval so that all ports are not polled at the same instant For example if the polling inter...

Page 599: ...pling factor For example if one port is configured for a sample rate of 1024 and a second port on the same slot is configured for a sample rate of 4096 the second port s hardware actually samples one...

Page 600: ...family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 600 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Availability This...

Page 601: ...to 536870912 Configuring a lower number for the sample rate means that more samples will be taken increasing the load on the switch Do not configure the sample rate to a number lower than the default...

Page 602: ...ly with ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 you can now configure how ExtremeWare XOS handles a detected fault based on the configuration of the configure sys recovery level slot slot_number none reset shutdown or t...

Page 603: ...ion Table 14 System behavior for the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch Fault Handling Configuration Module Recovery Configuration Behavior configure sys health check all level normal configure sys recov...

Page 604: ...recovery level switch command Strict would appear next to Enabled Example On the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch the following command configures the switch to forward faults to be handled by the leve...

Page 605: ...hnical Support personnel The system health checker tests I O modules and the backplane by forwarding backplane diagnostic packets On the BlackDiamond 10808 and the BlackDiamond 12804 switches addition...

Page 606: ...ling interval is updated to 80 seconds interval 10 seconds If backplane diagnostic packets are enabled on a slot and you modify the polling interval on the switch the new interval value takes preceden...

Page 607: ...Diamond 10808 or the BlackDiamond 12804 switches the following command configures the backplane diagnostic packet interval to 8 seconds and the polling interval to 80 seconds configure sys health chec...

Page 608: ...er only under the guidance of Extreme Networks Technical Support personnel If the system recovery level is all the system always reboots after a software task exception This is the default setting and...

Page 609: ...Health check Enabled Normal Recovery Mode All System Watchdog Enabled NOTE All platforms display the software recovery setting as Recovery Mode Example The following command configures a switch to not...

Page 610: ...s you that the errors are ignored This does not guarantee that the module remains operational however the switch does not reboot the module reset Configures the offending MSM or I O module to reset up...

Page 611: ...s in all of the configured shut down slots are taken offline in response to the reported errors MSMs are available for debugging purposes only The affected module remains in the shutdown state across...

Page 612: ...This does not guarantee that the module remains operational however the switch does not reboot the module reset Single MSM Resets the MSM Dual MSM Resets the primary MSM and fails over to the backup M...

Page 613: ...using the clear sys recovery level command for the MSM to become operational After you clear the shutdown state you must reboot the switch For more information see the clear sys recovery level command...

Page 614: ...le The e flag appears only if you configure the module recovery setting to none The following sample output displays the module recovery action In this example notice the flags identified for slot 10...

Page 615: ...Flags MB S E Serial number 800158 00 01 06014 00022 Hw Module Type G48Pe SW Version 11 5 0 4 SW Build v1150b4 Configured Type G48Pe Ports available 48 Recovery Mode Shutdown Flags M Backplane link to...

Page 616: ...OS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 616 Example The following command configures a switch to not take an action if a hardware fault occurs configure sys recovery level slot none History This command was f...

Page 617: ...tdown Configures the switch to shutdown upon fault detection All ports are taken offline in response to the reported errors however the management port remains operational for debugging purposes only...

Page 618: ...SysLocation SysContact support extremenetworks com 1 888 257 3000 System MAC 00 04 96 1F A5 71 Recovery Mode All Ignore System Watchdog Enabled If you configure the hardware recovery setting to none...

Page 619: ...The syslog facility level for local use vr_name The virtual router that can reach the syslog host severity Filters the messages sent to the remote syslog server target to have the selected severity o...

Page 620: ...me When a syslog server is added it is associated with the filter DefaultFilter Use the configure log target filter command to associate a different filter The syslog facility level is defined as loca...

Page 621: ...he Summit X450 family of switches do not support user created VRs This command is used to delete a remote syslog server target Example The following command deletes the remote syslog server with an IP...

Page 622: ...Statistics ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 622 Platform Availability This com...

Page 623: ...ges sent to those targets The system has one built in filter named DefaultFilter which itself may be customized Therefore the create log filter command can be used if a filter other than DefaultFilter...

Page 624: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 624 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10...

Page 625: ...pt for the filter DefaultFilter The specified filter must not be associated with a target To remove that association associate the target with DefaultFilter instead of the filter to be deleted using t...

Page 626: ...itch The disable cli config logging command discontinues the recording of all switch configuration changes and their sources that are made using the CLI via Telnet or the local console After you disab...

Page 627: ...orts the ports no longer send ELSM hello messages to their peers and no longer maintain ELSM states When you enable ELSM on the specified ports the ports participate in ELSM with their peers and begin...

Page 628: ...ubsequent transition from the Up state to the Down state the port enters the Down Stuck state If the port enters the Down Stuck state you can clear the stuck state and have the port enter the Down sta...

Page 629: ...eries switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 629 Example The following command disables ELSM automatic restart for slot 2 ports 1 2 on the switch disable elsm ports 2 1 2 2 auto restart H...

Page 630: ...ng debug messages which can severely degrade performance For typical network device monitoring debug mode should remain disabled the default setting Debug mode should only be enabled when advised by t...

Page 631: ...e log display is disabled log information is no longer written to the serial console This command setting is saved to FLASH and determines the initial setting of the console display at boot up You can...

Page 632: ...the memory buffer NVRAM primary MSM and backup MSM targets are enabled Other targets must be enabled before messages are sent to those targets console Specifies the console display memory buffer Speci...

Page 633: ...console disable log display The disable log display command is equivalent to disable log target console display command Modular Switches Only Note that the backup msm target is only active on the pri...

Page 634: ...isabled state the switch continues to respond queries of statistics Collecting of history alarms and events is stopped however the switch still queries old data To view the status of RMON polling on t...

Page 635: ...efault Disabled Usage Guidelines This command disables sFlow globally on the switch When you disable sFlow globally the individual ports are also put into the disabled state If you later enable the gl...

Page 636: ...t Disabled Usage Guidelines This command disables sFlow on a particular list of ports Once sFlow is disabled on a port sampling and polling will stops If sFlow is disabled globally all sampling and po...

Page 637: ...system health checker BlackDiamond 10808 and BlackDiamond 12804 Switches Only If you use this command in addition to disabling backplane diagnostic packets the polling frequency returns to the defaul...

Page 638: ...ollowing command disables backplane diagnostic packets on slot 3 and returns the polling frequency on slot 3 to 60 seconds disable sys health check slot 3 On the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch the fo...

Page 639: ...Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines Disables logging to all remote syslog server targets not to the switch targets This setting is saved in...

Page 640: ...y way of Telnet or the local console The changes are logged to the system log Each log entry includes the user account name that performed the changes and the source IP address of the client if Telnet...

Page 641: ...ges between two ELSM peers If ELSM detects a failure the ELSM enabled port responds by blocking traffic on that port For example if a peer stops receiving messages from its peer ELSM brings down that...

Page 642: ...messages to communicate information about the health of the network to its peer port You can also configure the interval by which the ELSM enabled ports sends hello messages For more information about...

Page 643: ...hreshold the port enters the Down Stuck state The ELSM sticky threshold specifies the number of times a port can transition between the Up and Down states The sticky threshold is not user configurable...

Page 644: ...d 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 644 Example The following command enables ELSM automatic restart for slot 2 ports 1 2 on the switch enable elsm ports 2 1 2 2 auto res...

Page 645: ...h can severely degrade performance For typical network device monitoring debug mode should remain disabled the default setting Debug mode should only be enabled when advised by technical support or wh...

Page 646: ...n is ended unless you explicitly disable the log display You configure the messages displayed in the log using the configure log display or configure log target console display commands You can also u...

Page 647: ...e messages are sent to those targets Configuration changes to the session target are in effect only for the duration of the console display or Telnet session and are not saved in FLASH Others are save...

Page 648: ...e log target console display command Modular Switches Only Note that the backup msm target is only active on the primary MSM and the primary msm target is only active on the backup MSM Example The fol...

Page 649: ...unters for complete customization of trend analysis Alarms The Alarms group provides a versatile general mechanism for setting threshold and sampling intervals to generate events on any RMON variable...

Page 650: ...been expensive Therefore the approach taken by Extreme Networks has been to build an inexpensive RMON probe into the agent of each system This allows RMON to be widely deployed around the network wit...

Page 651: ...e sFlow and mirroring at the same time If you have a combination of BlackDiamond 8800 original a series and e series modules installed with sFlow configured globally on the switch you can enable mirro...

Page 652: ...ommand enables sFlow sampling globally enable sflow If you enable sFlow globally on the Summit X450 series switch or the BlackDiamond 8800 original modules the switch displays a message similar to the...

Page 653: ...ring but not both This restriction is not applicable to the BlackDiamond 10808 or the BlackDiamond 12804 switches sFlow and mirroring are not mutually exclusive on the BlackDiamond 8800 a series and e...

Page 654: ...rroring on original I O module ports provided you do not enable sFlow on original I O module ports If you enable sFlow on original I O module ports sFlow uses QP2 to sample traffic When enabling sFlow...

Page 655: ...BlackDiamond 10808 and the BlackDiamond 12804 switches additional checking for the validity of these packets is completed by performing a checksum By isolating faults to a specific module or backplane...

Page 656: ...ly described polling is always enabled on the switch which is why you see the system health check setting as Enabled The following truncated output from a BlackDiamond 8810 switch displays the system...

Page 657: ...ng you must do the following Configure the syslog host to accept and log messages Enable remote logging by using the enable syslog command Configure remote logging by using the configure syslog comman...

Page 658: ...er restarts and the port remains in the Up state Down Indicates that the port is down blocked or has not received Hello messages from its peer If an ELSM enabled port does not receive a hello message...

Page 659: ...o messages from its peer dn Indicates that ELSM is enabled but the ELSM peers are not communicating the ELSM link state is down In the down state ELSM transitions the peer port on this device to the d...

Page 660: ...BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 660 The following is sample output from this command Port ELSM State Hello Time 5 14 Up 1 second 5 18 Down 1 second Histor...

Page 661: ...logical link on the switch The ELSM link state can be one of the following Up Indicates that ELSM is enabled and the ELSM peer ports are up and communicating the ELSM link state is up In the up state...

Page 662: ...being transmitted The transmit state can be one of the following HelloRx Specifies that the ELSM enabled port is up and receiving Hello messages from its peer The port remains in the HelloRx state and...

Page 663: ...nicating the ELSM link state is up In the up state the ELSM enabled port sends and receives hello messages from its peer dn Indicates that ELSM is enabled but the ELSM peers are not communicating the...

Page 664: ...ld Threshold 2 Auto Restart Enabled Sticky Threshold 1 Sticky Threshold Counter 1 Rx Hello 59061 Rx Hello 0 Tx Hello 59060 Tx Hello 1 ELSM Up Down Count UP 1 DOWN 0 ELSM Info Port 2 Link State Ready E...

Page 665: ...d as Fan 1 Fan 2 and so on modular switches also include a description of the location for example Upper or Upper Right Specifies the individual state for each fan in a fan tray and its current speed...

Page 666: ...r 08 2004 Temperature 28 93 deg C Upper Fan 1 Operational at 4380 rpms Lower Fan 2 Operational at 4320 rpms The following is sample output from the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch FanTray information...

Page 667: ...st available in an ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Information about the location of the fan tray for the BlackDiamond 10808 switch right or left fan tray was added to the show fans output in ExtremeWare XOS 11...

Page 668: ...west to oldest messages Specifies the target location from which to display the log messages memory buffer Show messages stored in volatile memory default nvram Show messages stored in NVRAM events Sh...

Page 669: ...are included Without the only keyword events at that severity or more urgent are displayed For example severity warning implies critical error or warning whereas severity warning only implies only wa...

Page 670: ...verity levels assigned by the switch Level Description Critical A serious problem has been detected that is compromising the operation of the system and that the system cannot function as expected unl...

Page 671: ...e 671 11 12 2004 00 36 23 77 Warn dm Warn MSM A Slot 7 being Powered OFF due to insuf ficient power A total of 83 log messages were displayed The following command displays messages containing the str...

Page 672: ...e The following command displays the log components show log components The following is sample output from this command Severity Component Title Threshold AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting...

Page 673: ...ion Version Manager Critical ESRP Extreme Standby Router Protocol Error Aware Subsystem description Info InPdu Subsystem description Info Nbr Subsystem description Info OutPdu Subsystem description In...

Page 674: ...M debug messages Notice hello Hello messages Warning mcdbg multicast forwarding engine Warning msg Trace for pim control packtes Notice nbr Neighbor creation deletion etc Warning rpm RP message exchan...

Page 675: ...vlan ack Error dbg Debug information Info err errors Error mac Virtual MAC Debugging Info msgs Messages Info VRRP Config State messages Warning Advert Subsystem description Warning System System Libr...

Page 676: ...nabled targets the associated filter severity match expression and format is displayed The debug mode state of the switch is also displayed Example The following command displays the configuration of...

Page 677: ...d Severity Values C Critical E Error W Warning N Notice I Info Debug Severity S Debug Summary V Debug Verbose D Debug Data Debug Severities but log debug mode not enabled If Match parameters present P...

Page 678: ...ng is sample output from this command Log Filter Name myFilter I Severity E Comp Sub comp Condition CEWNISVD I STP I aaa Include Exclude I Include E Exclude Component Unreg Component Subcomponent is n...

Page 679: ...800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 679 Strict Match Y every match parameter entered must be present in the event N match parameters need not be present in the event History...

Page 680: ...mand displays the log configuration for the specified target The associated filter severity match expression and format is displayed console Show the log configuration for the console display memory b...

Page 681: ...Match regex Any Severity Warning through Critical Format MM DD YYYY HH MM SS hh Severity Component SubComponent Condit ion Log Target console Enabled no Filter Name DefaultFilter Match regex Any Sever...

Page 682: ...Statistics ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 682 Platform Availability This com...

Page 683: ...regardless of whether it was filtered or not The keywords include notified and occurred only display events with non zero counter values for the corresponding counter This command also displays a ref...

Page 684: ...ent has occurred since last clear or reboot Flags Not all applications responded in time with there count values In cluded Set to Y es if one or more targets filter includes this event Notified of tim...

Page 685: ...tail option is specified the message format is displayed for the event conditions specified The message format parameters are replaced by the value of the parameters when the message is generated To g...

Page 686: ...total STP InBPDU Ign Debug Summary 2 total STP InBPDU Mismatch Warning 2 total The following command displays the details of the event condition PDUTrace in the component STP InBPDU show log events st...

Page 687: ...and earlier This setting is not saved therefore you must specify the no refresh parameter each time you want a snapshot of the port receive errors This status information may be useful for your techn...

Page 688: ...overflow in the switch Port Monitoring Display Keys For information about the available port monitoring display keys see the show ports statistics command Example The following command displays recei...

Page 689: ...Active R Ready NP Port Not Present 0 Clear Counters U page up D page down ESC exit History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The link status information was updated to include...

Page 690: ...and earlier This setting is not saved therefore you must specify the no refresh parameter each time you want a snapshot of the port statistics Jumbo frame statistics are displayed for switches only th...

Page 691: ...d the default behavior Table 20 describes the keys used to control the display that appears if you auto refresh is disabled Example The following command displays port statistics for slot 1 ports 1 th...

Page 692: ...0 0 0 0 10 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 Link Status A Active R Ready NP Port Not Present 0 Clear...

Page 693: ...his setting is not saved therefore you must specify the no refresh parameter each time you want a snapshot of the port transmit errors This status information may be useful for your technical support...

Page 694: ...monitoring display keys see the show ports statistics command Example The following command displays transmit error statistics for slot 5 ports 4 through 7 on a modular switch with auto refresh disabl...

Page 695: ...age down ESC exitPort Tx Error History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The link status information was updated to include NP Port not present in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Support f...

Page 696: ...tput contains usage information for all memory types Example The following command displays RMON memory statistics show rmon memory The following is sample output from this command RMON Memory Informa...

Page 697: ...rmonLog 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rmonEvent 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rmonEventDescription 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 rmonEventCommunity 0 1...

Page 698: ...atistics for rmonEvent Size 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 176 208 256 384 512 768 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 18432 40960 64000 Alloced 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AllocedPeak 0 0 0 0...

Page 699: ...u sample limit Maximum number of packets per second sampled before sample throttling takes effect Agent IP IP address inserted into the sFlow data packets to identify the sFlow switch Collectors To wh...

Page 700: ...10 201 6 250 Port 6343 VR VR Mgmt SFLOW Port Configuration Port Status Sample rate Subsampling Config Actual factor 1 41 enabled 8192 8192 1 2 40 enabled 1024 1024 1 2 58 enabled 8192 8192 8 2 59 ena...

Page 701: ...orts Sampled Frames Number of packets that have been sampled by sFlow Transmitted Frames Number of UDP packets sent to remote collector s Broadcast Frames Number of broadcast frames received on sFlow...

Page 702: ...upports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 702 Platform Availability This command is available on all availabl...

Page 703: ...wer controllers The switch monitors the temperature of each component and generates a warning if the temperature exceeds the normal operating range If the temperature exceeds the minimum maximum limit...

Page 704: ...ot 6 G60X 34 68 Normal Slot 7 G60X 34 31 Normal Slot 8 MSM A MSM 1XL 31 37 Normal MSM B MSM 1XL 29 75 Normal PSUCTRL 1 PSUCTRL 2 29 00 Normal Temp Range 10 00 Min 0 00 50 00 Normal 60 00 Max The follo...

Page 705: ...onents installed in a modular switch NOTE For information about the physical location of the serial number on your switch refer to the section that describes your specific switch model in the Extreme...

Page 706: ...itch Process Name The name of the process Version The version number of the process BuiltBy The name of the software build manager Link Date The date the executable was linked Example The following co...

Page 707: ...34 00005 Rev 2 0 uC 2 00 FPGA 5 07 Slot 6 804019 00 01 05234 00026 Rev 1 0 uC 2 00 FPGA 5 07 MSM A 804017 00 02 05394 00007 Rev 2 0 BootROM 0 3 0 9 IMG 11 4 0 18 uC 1 07 FPGA 3 1f MSM B 804017 00 02 0...

Page 708: ...3 0 0 2 release manager Thu Mar 31 09 37 24 PST 2005 elrp 3 0 0 1 release manager Thu Mar 31 09 36 27 PST 2005 ems 3 0 0 2 release manager Thu Mar 31 09 50 40 PST 2005 epm 3 0 0 3 release manager Thu...

Page 709: ...5 Command Reference Guide 709 Switch secondary Wed Jan 21 06 51 13 UTC 2004 11 2 0 10 summitx450 11 2 0 10 cna x mod v1120b10 If you specify the partition option only images on the specified partitio...

Page 710: ...figuration of DefaultFilter back to its original settings If the filter name specified is not DefaultFilter this command sets the filter to have no events configured and therefore no incidents will pa...

Page 711: ...f process name off process slot on modular switches only process id off source line off The following defaults apply to syslog targets per RFC 3164 timestamp seconds date mmm dd console Specifies the...

Page 712: ...ches only process id off source line off Usage Guidelines NOTE The BlackDiamond 8800 series switch and the Summit X450 family of switches do not support user created VRs Use this command to reset the...

Page 713: ...address 0 0 0 0 sampling frequency sample one every 8196 packets polling interval 20 seconds maximum CPU sample limit 2000 samples per second sFlow is unconfigured and disabled on all ports Usage Gui...

Page 714: ...the default value Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default The default IP address is 0 0 0 0 Usage Guidelines This command resets the sFlow agent IP address to its defaul...

Page 715: ...switch and the Summit X450 family of switches do not support user created VRs This command allows you to reset the specified sFlow collector parameters to the default values Both the commands unconfi...

Page 716: ...1 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 716 Platform Availability This command is available on all pla...

Page 717: ...nd stops sampling them Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command removes the specified ports from the sFlow configuration and stops sampling them Example The following command uncon...

Page 718: ...eated VRs ipaddress Specifies the ipaddress of the TFTP server vr_name Specifies the virtual router that can reach the TFTP server NOTE The BlackDiamond 8800 series switch and the Summit X450 family o...

Page 719: ...ly for host names Underscore _ Permitted only for host names Colon When naming or configuring an IP address for your network server remember the requirements listed above Remote Filename Character Res...

Page 720: ...Statistics ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 720 Platform Availability This com...

Page 721: ...a member of only one port based VLAN and is by default a member of the VLAN named Default 802 1Q tag Tagging is most commonly used to create VLANs that span switches Ethernet LLC SAP or LLC SNAP Ether...

Page 722: ...Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to clear the database that binds the BVLAN MAC address to the SVLAN or customer MAC address To display the MAC addresses issue the sho...

Page 723: ...age Guidelines Only tagged ports can be added to the BVLAN You cannot configure Connectivity Fault Management CFM on ports added to the BVLAN or apply ACLs to those ports Example The following command...

Page 724: ...e in only one BVLAN and must have a unique service ID within that BVLAN NOTE When you add an SVLAN to a BVLAN they cannot have overlapping ports You cannot have the same ports on a specific SVLAN that...

Page 725: ...fault N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete ports from the BVLAN Example The following command deletes the ports 1 1 and 1 2 from the backbone VLAN BVLAN black configure bvlan black delete p...

Page 726: ...A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete SVLANs from the BVLAN Example The following command deletes the SVLAN white from the BVLAN black configure bvlan black delete svlan white History This co...

Page 727: ...is Extreme Networks recommends setting this value prior to any other 802 1ah configuration Changing the 802 1ah may cause the system to flush both the FDB and the MAC binding tables To display the 802...

Page 728: ...escription Default N A Usage Guidelines The BVLAN must be tagged You can have up to 4094 BVLANs on each switch Example The following command assigns the tag 100 to the backbone VLAN BVLAN black config...

Page 729: ...tocols can be defined The protocol filter must already exist before you can use this command use the create bvlan command to create the protocol filter No more than seven protocols can be active and c...

Page 730: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 730 Platform Availability This command is availabl...

Page 731: ...otocol snap Ethertype inside an IEEE SNAP packet encapsulation Example The following command deletes protocol type LLC SAP with a value of FEFF from protocol fred configure protocol fred delete llc fe...

Page 732: ...on ports added to the SVLAN or apply any other ACLs Example The following command assigns port 1 5 as a tagged port to the SVLAN white configure svlan white add ports 1 5 tagged History This command w...

Page 733: ...Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete ports from the SVLAN Example The following command deletes port 3 5 from the SVLAN white configure svlan white delete ports 3 5 Hist...

Page 734: ...in MAC or 802 1ah tunnels This value is used by the system to map the original S tag on the vMAN or 802 1ad packet to the I tag on the MAC in MAC or 802 1ah frame This value is used in the MAC binding...

Page 735: ...1 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 735 Platform Availability This command is available only on th...

Page 736: ...idelines The SVLAN must be tagged You can use a tag previously assigned to another SVLAN as long as they are not on the same ingressing port Example The following command assigns a tag value of 200 to...

Page 737: ...o a different VLAN you must first remove them from the default VLAN You do not need to do this to add them to another VLAN as tagged ports if you attempt to add an untagged port to a VLAN prior to rem...

Page 738: ...e the keyword the system may return an error message Beginning with ExtremeWare XOS version 11 4 the system returns the following message if the ports you are adding are already EAPS primary or EAPS s...

Page 739: ...eletes one or more ports in a VLAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command removes ports 1 1 1 2 4 3 and 5 6 on a modular switch from a VLAN named accounting...

Page 740: ...ess use the create vlan command to create the VLAN also the vMAN must already exist vlan_name Specifies a VLAN name ipaddress Specifies an IPv4 address ipNetmask Specifies an IPv4 subnet mask in dotte...

Page 741: ...wing steps 1 Enable IP multicast forwarding 2 Enable and configure multicasting NOTE You must upgraded to an Advanced Edge license to use vMAN functionality on a Summit X450e series switch BlackDiamon...

Page 742: ...ches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 742 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The IPv6 parameters were added in Extreme...

Page 743: ...LAN Default NOTE If you use the same name across categories for example STPD and EAPS names Extreme Networks recommends that you specify the identifying keyword as well as the actual name If you do no...

Page 744: ...family of switches only These devices do not forward packets with a protocol based VLAN set to AppleTalk To ensure that AppleTalk packets are forwarded on the device create a protocol based VLAN set...

Page 745: ...f switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 745 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The IPv6 parameter was added in Ext...

Page 746: ...gned to the default VLAN and tag 4095 is assigned to the management VLAN The 802 1Q tag will also be used as the internal VLANid by the switch You can specify a value that is currently used as an inte...

Page 747: ...untagged port although this port does accept tagged packets You must configure the vMAN tunnel egress or trunk port as an untagged port so that the vMAN header is stripped from the frame NOTE You must...

Page 748: ...e system returns an error You must enable jumbo frames for the entire module or stand alone switch prior to creating and configuring vMANs Use the enable jumbo frame ports all command to enable jumbo...

Page 749: ...MAN must already exist before you can add or delete ports use the create vman command to create the VLAN Example The following command deletes ports 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 6 on a modular switch to a vMAN n...

Page 750: ...module or on the same stand alone switch for the following devices BlackDiamond 8800 a series and e series modules and Summit X450a and X4503 series switches You can configure both vMAN and VLAN simu...

Page 751: ...switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 751 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Availability This command i...

Page 752: ...that arrive on the port you added to the vMAN You can specify a value that is currently used as an internal VLANid on another VLAN it will become the VLANid for the VLAN you specify and a new VLANid w...

Page 753: ...iption Default N A Usage Guidelines You can use any physical topology on the core backbone network Although you can address IP addresses to backbone interfaces to test connectivity do not enable IP fo...

Page 754: ...as the matching criteria to determine if a particular packet belongs to a particular VLAN After you create the protocol you must configure it using the configure protocol command To assign it to a VL...

Page 755: ...which is transparent to users Do not install Layer 2 control protocols on these interfaces because all BPDUs are tunneled through the 802 1ah or MAC in MAC tunnel Do not assign any IP addresses to the...

Page 756: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 756 Platform Availability This command is available only on the B...

Page 757: ...you do not specify the virtual router the VLAN is created in the current virtual router Usage Guidelines A newly created VLAN has no member ports is untagged and uses protocol filter any until you co...

Page 758: ...e default virtual router VR Default The management VLAN is always in the management virtual router VR Mgmt Once you create virtual routers ExtremeWare XOS software allows you to designate one of these...

Page 759: ...50 family of switches you must enable jumbo frames on the switch If you do not specify the virtual router the vMAN is created in the current virtual router NOTE Beginning with ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 you...

Page 760: ...switch to switch ports and untagged on the ingress and egress ports of the tunnel Use the following command configure vman vman name add ports all port_list untagged tagged nobroadcast NOTE You must...

Page 761: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 761 Platform Availability This command is available on all platforms with an Ad...

Page 762: ...ah backbone interface or tunnel entrance Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines When you issue this command the system automatically removes all SVLANs added to the specified BVLAN Example Th...

Page 763: ...letes a user defined protocol Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines If you delete a protocol that is in use by a VLAN the protocol associated with than VLAN will become none Example The foll...

Page 764: ...vice instance Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines When you issue this command the system automatically removes the specified SVLAN from its BVLAN removes all ports added to the SVLAN and r...

Page 765: ...ines If you delete a VLAN that has untagged port members and you want those ports to be returned to the default VLAN you must add them back explicitly using the configure svlan delete ports command NO...

Page 766: ...ame Description Deletes a previously created vMAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes the vMAN accounting delete vman accounting History This com...

Page 767: ...contained in the outer tag or vMAN encapsulation tag when assigning the packet to an egress queue at the egress port of the vMAN NOTE See Chapter 15 QoS Commands for information on configuring and dis...

Page 768: ...interface to become active Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to specify a stable interface as a source interface for routing protocols This decreases the possibility of...

Page 769: ...isable a VLAN running Layer 2 protocol traffic the system returns a message similar to the following VLAN accounting cannot be disabled because it is actively use by an L2 Protocol You can disable the...

Page 770: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 770 Platform Availability This command is availabl...

Page 771: ...to refer to the 802 1p value contained in the inner or original tag when assigning the packet to an egress queue at the egress port of the vMAN NOTE See Chapter 15 QoS Commands for information on con...

Page 772: ...interface to become active Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to specify a stable interface as a source interface for routing protocols This decreases the possibility of...

Page 773: ...VLAN that you previously disabled Syntax Description Default Enabled Usage Guidelines This command allows you to administratively enable specified VLANs that you previously disabled Example The follo...

Page 774: ...use the command show vman ethertype Example The following is an example of the display from the show bvlan command BD 10808 6 show bvlan Name VID Protocol Addr Flags Proto Ports Virtual Active router...

Page 775: ...Default IPv6 None STPD None Protocol Match all unfiltered protocols Loopback Disabled NetLogin Disabled QosProfile QP1 Dot1ah Mode Backbone Service Count 0 Ports 0 Number of active ports 0 The display...

Page 776: ...display information on the database binding the backbone and customer MAC addresses This command displays the following information BVLAN name B TAG value MAC address of the 802 1ah configured bridge...

Page 777: ...s command BD 10808 1 show mac binding BVLAN VID Mac SVLAN VID MAC Flags AGE Port B 100 00 01 30 F9 9E 60 S1 10 00 A0 00 00 00 01 d 60 2 1 B 100 00 01 30 F9 9E 61 S2 20 00 B0 00 00 00 02 d Flags d Dyna...

Page 778: ...he defined protocol filter s with the types and values of its component protocols Example The following is an example of the show protocol command Protocol Name Type Value IP etype 0x0800 etype 0x0806...

Page 779: ...e command show vman ethertype Example The following is an example of the display from the show svlan command BD 10808 8 show svlan Name VID Protocol Addr Flags Proto Ports Virtual Active router Total...

Page 780: ...Virtual router VR Default IPv6 None STPD None Protocol Match all unfiltered protocols Loopback Disable NetLogin Disabled QosProfile QP1 Dot1ah Mode Service I SID 250 In Backbone backbone Ports 0 Numb...

Page 781: ...c vlan Use the command show vlan to display summary information for all VLANs It shows various configuration options as a series of flags see the example below VLAN and protocol names may be abbreviat...

Page 782: ...my_ipv6_100 Router Interface on my_ipv6_100 is enabled and up MTU 1500 Locally registered unicast addresses 2001 db8 8 802 200c 417a 64 fe80 230 48ff fe41 ed97 my_ipv6_100 64 Flags IPv6 Forwarding YE...

Page 783: ...5 42 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 49 5 50 5 51 5 52 5 53 5 54 5 55 5 56 5 57 5 58 5 59 5 60 5 61 5 62 5 63 5 64 5 65 5 66 5 67 5 68 5 69 5 70 5 71 5 72 5 73 5 74 5 75 5 76 5 77 5 78 5 79 5 80 5 81...

Page 784: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 3 The virtual router and administratively enabled disabled information was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platform Availability This command is available on all platforms Information...

Page 785: ...ng 802 1ah on the switch the show vman displays information on the BVLANs and the SVLANs as well You can display the same information using the show bvlan or show svlan command NOTE To display the Eth...

Page 786: ...he display from the show vman vlan_name command VLAN Interface with name test created by user Admin State Enabled Tagging Untagged Internal tag 4090 Priority 802 1P Priority 0 Virtual router VR Defaul...

Page 787: ...y 802 1P Priority 0 Virtual router VR Default IPv6 None STPD None Protocol Match all unfiltered protocols Loopback Disabled NetLogin Disabled ERL Designated Port 6 2 QosProfile QP1 Ports 4 Number of a...

Page 788: ...Core license to use vMANs If you do not specify any parameters this command removes the primary IPv4 address from the VLAN NOTE With IPv6 you cannot remove the last link local IPv6 address until all...

Page 789: ...of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 789 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The IPv6 parameters were added in...

Page 790: ...VLAN Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 790...

Page 791: ...me the device has not transmitted This prevents the database from becoming full of obsolete entries by ensuring that when a device is removed from the network its entry is deleted from the database Dy...

Page 792: ...criteria When no options are specified the command clears all dynamic FDB entries Example The following command clears any FDB entries associated with ports 4 3 4 5 on a modular switch clear fdb port...

Page 793: ...defined as static nonaging entries This means that they do not age out but non permanent static entries can be deleted if the switch is reset The software flushes the FDB table once the aging timeout...

Page 794: ...e created If the same MAC address and VLAN is encountered on another virtual port that is not included in the permanent MAC entry it is handled as a blackhole entry The static entry is not updated whe...

Page 795: ...ping rules take precedence over static multicast MAC addresses in the IP multicast range 01 00 5e xx xx xx unless IGMP snooping is disabled Example The following command adds a permanent static entry...

Page 796: ...sage Guidelines None Example The following example deletes a permanent entry from the FDB delete fdbentry 00 E0 2B 12 34 56 vlan marketing The following example deletes all permanent entries from the...

Page 797: ...all packets only on all packets on the BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switches Disabling egress flooding aids the following enhances security enhances privacy improves network performance This is partic...

Page 798: ...sabling broadcast or all egress flooding to a port also stops broadcast packets to be flooded to that port BlackDiamond 8800 family of switches and Summit X450 switch only You can disable egress flood...

Page 799: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 799 Platform Availability This command is avai...

Page 800: ...If IGMP snooping is disabled multicast packets are not flooded Egress flooding can be disabled on ports that are in a load sharing group If that is the situation the ports in the group take on the eg...

Page 801: ...es switch and the Summit X450 family of switches is enabled egress flooding for all packet types BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch only You must disable egress flooding on all packets on the specifi...

Page 802: ...d as a result of the netlogin process mac based vlans Displays all netlogin MAC based VLAN FDB entries NOTE This parameter is supported only for the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond...

Page 803: ...ss Blackhole v MAC based VLAN Total 1 Static 1 Perm 1 Dyn 0 Dropped 0 FDB Aging time 300 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The stats and netlogin parameters were first a...

Page 804: ...FDB Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 804...

Page 805: ...tem User virtual routers These are the virtual routers created and named by users NOTE User virtual routers are supported only on the BlackDiamond 10808 and BlackDiamond 12804 switches Each virtual ro...

Page 806: ...haracters long The name must be unique among the VLAN and virtual router names on the switch For backward compatibility you cannot name a virtual router VR 0 VR 1 or VR 2 as they were the original nam...

Page 807: ...ated and no support for any routing protocols is added Use this command to start the layer 3 protocol specified on the virtual router The choices for protocol name are RIP OSPF BGP PIM You cannot add...

Page 808: ...ace is created and no support for any routing protocols is added Use this command to assign ports to a virtual router Since all ports are initially assigned to VR Default you may need to delete the de...

Page 809: ...ntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines You cannot add or delete protocols from the system virtual routers VR Mgmt VR Control VR Default Example The following command shutdowns and removes RIP f...

Page 810: ...is created and no support for any routing protocols is added Use this command to remove ports from a virtual router Since all ports are initially assigned to VR Default you may need to delete the desi...

Page 811: ...all of the VLANs in the virtual router will be deleted All of the ports assigned to this virtual router will be deleted and made available to assign to other virtual routers Any routing protocol that...

Page 812: ...N mgmt belong to VR Mgmt Internal system operations use VR Control The default VLAN belongs to VR Default Beginning with release 11 0 you can create additional virtual routers called user virtual rout...

Page 813: ...opr VR Mgmt 1 0 Flags Routing protocols configured on the virtual router b BGP o OSPF r RIP p PIM The following command displays the virtual router helix show virtual router helix The following is sam...

Page 814: ...routing protocols creating VLANs and deleting VLANs apply only to the current virtual router domain Under a virtual router configuration domain any virtual router commands are applied only to that vi...

Page 815: ...l the subsequent OSPF commands would apply to that virtual router unless the context is changed again A virtual router is identified by a name up to 32 characters long The name must be unique among th...

Page 816: ...Commands for Virtual Routers ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 816...

Page 817: ...r dropped Additionally for the BlackDiamond 8800 family and Summit X450 switches only packets can be metered using ACLs Using access lists has no impact on switch performance Access lists are typicall...

Page 818: ...mmand can only determine if the syntax of the policy file is correct and can be loaded into the policy manager database Since a policy can be used by multiple applications a particular application may...

Page 819: ...rrent applications are ACL access lists RT routing profiles route maps CLF CLEAR Flow The syntax display does not show the text synonyms for numeric entries For example the icmp type match condition a...

Page 820: ...d the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 820 The following is sample output for this command match ACL icmp type uint32 val History This command was first ava...

Page 821: ...or Edit operates in one of two modes command and input When a file first opens you are in the command mode To write in the file use the keyboard arrow keys to position your cursor within the file then...

Page 822: ...e and the policy then takes effect Use the following command to refresh a policy refresh policy policy name If you just want to check to be sure the policy contains no syntax errors use the following...

Page 823: ...ACLs have been momentarily cleared Smart Refresh works well for minor changes however if the changes are too great the refresh reverts to the earlier behavior To take advantage of Smart Refresh disab...

Page 824: ...e 824 For an ACL policy the command is rejected if there is a configuration error or hardware resources are not available Example The following example refreshes the policy zone5 refresh policy zone5...

Page 825: ...t If no policy name is specified all policies are shown Usage Guidelines Use this command to display which clients are using the specified policy The detail option displays the rules that make up the...

Page 826: ...Policy Manager Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 826...

Page 827: ...ential order and is either forwarded to a specified QoS profile or dropped Additionally for the BlackDiamond 8800 series and Summit X450 family switches only packets can be metered using ACLs Using ac...

Page 828: ...counters of the ACL on port 2 1 clear access list counter port 2 1 The following example clears the counter counter2 of the ACL on port 2 1 clear access list counter counter2 port 2 1 History This co...

Page 829: ...t X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 829 Platform Availability This command is available on all platforms The egress option is...

Page 830: ...ith the meter configuration Example The following example clears all the out of profile counters for the meters of the ACL on port 2 1 clear access list meter port 2 1 The following example clears the...

Page 831: ...Specifying the keyword any applies the ACL to all the ports and is referred to as the wildcard ACL This ACL is evaluated for ports without a specific ACL applied to it and is also applied to packets...

Page 832: ...ference Guide 832 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The VLAN option was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 The egress options was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 3...

Page 833: ...r precedence than any ACLs applied through ACL policy files Specifying the keyword any applies the ACL to all the ports and is referred to as the wildcard ACL This ACL is evaluated for ports without a...

Page 834: ...ic ACL to port 1 2 at ingress configure access list add icmp echo first ports 1 2 The following command applies the dynamic ACL udpdacl to port 1 2 with a higher precedence than rule icmp echo configu...

Page 835: ...mmand removes the dynamic ACL icmp echo from the port 1 2 configure access list delete icmp echo ports 1 2 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 3 Platform Availability This c...

Page 836: ...t mask is 0 ffff ffff ffff 0 ffff ffff ffff so for purposes of ACL matching the switch ignores the bits 1 through 16 and 65 through 80 counting the highest order bit as bit 1 There is a separate mask...

Page 837: ...and actions is in the ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide in Chapter 14 Access Lists ACLs Dynamic ACL rule names must be unique but can be the same as used in a policy file based ACL Any dynamic rule count...

Page 838: ...nge of 1200 to 1250 create access list udpacl source address 10 203 134 0 24 destination address 140 158 18 16 32 protocol udp source port 190 destination port 1200 1250 permit The previous example cr...

Page 839: ...Usage Guidelines This command deletes a dynamic ACL rule Before you delete a dynamic ACL it must be removed from any interfaces it is applied to Use the configure access list delete command to remove...

Page 840: ...special packets include STP and EAPS BPDUs and ARP replies for the switch When this feature is disabled these same packets will be denied if an ACL is applied that contains a matching entry that deni...

Page 841: ...The feature is enabled Usage Guidelines When access control lists ACLs are refreshed this feature provides that any packets arriving during the refresh will be blackholed If you disable this feature...

Page 842: ...ackets include STP and EAPS BPDUs and ARP replies for the switch If this feature is disabled these same packets will be denied if an ACL is applied that contains a matching entry that denies the packe...

Page 843: ...ists ACLs are refreshed this command provides that any packets arriving during the refresh will be blackholed As the ACL is being refreshed packets may arrive while the ACL is in an indeterminate stat...

Page 844: ...ot displayed To display dynamic ACLs use the following commands show access list dynamic show access list dynamic rule rule detail If you specify an interface all the policy entries and dynamic policy...

Page 845: ...dacl13 Dynamic Entry if match all ethernet destination address 00 01 05 00 00 00 then count c13 redirect 1 1 5 100 RuleNo 2 entry dacl14 Dynamic Entry if match all ethernet source address 00 01 05 00...

Page 846: ...ed Syntax Description There are no arguments or variables for this command Default N A Usage Guidelines This command displays the state of the ACL refresh blackhole set by the enable access list refre...

Page 847: ...ple displays all the counters for all ACLs show access list counter The output of this command is similar to the following Policy Name Vlan Name Port Direction Counter Name Packet Count Byte Count fir...

Page 848: ...counters for the ACL on port 2 1 show access list counter port 2 1 The output of this command is similar to the following Policy Name Vlan Name Port Direction Counter Name Packet Count Byte Count tc_2...

Page 849: ...fault N A Usage Guidelines This command displays the names of existing dynamic ACLs and how many times the ACL is used bound to an interface To see the conditions and actions for a dynamic ACL use the...

Page 850: ...cription Default The default is to display all interfaces ingress Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays all the dynamic ACL counters show access list dynamic counter History Thi...

Page 851: ...amic ACL udpacl show access list dynamic rule updacl The output of the command is similar to the following entry udpacl if match all source address 10 203 134 0 24 destination address 140 158 18 16 32...

Page 852: ...tches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 852 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 3 The detail keyword was added in ExtremeW...

Page 853: ...rs Example The following example displays all the counters the ACL on port 7 1 show access list meter port 2 1 The output of this command is similar to the following ACL Name Vlan Port Committed Max B...

Page 854: ...ches have a total of sixteen ACL masks per port on the switch To avoid exhausting the masks available on the switch you must carefully plan your use of ACL masks Use this command to display how many m...

Page 855: ...w many of these Layer 4 ranges are currently consumed by the ACLs on the slices that support a particular port The output of this command also displays which ports share the same slices as the specifi...

Page 856: ...eries switches support 128 rules per slice for the slices that support each group of 24 ports Since the BlackDiamond 8800 a series modules and Summit X450a series switches support sixteen slices per 2...

Page 857: ...5 Command Reference Guide 857 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 This command was modified to support BlackDiamond 8800 a series and e series modules and Summit X450a and...

Page 858: ...maximum of 2048 rules supported for the group Since the BlackDiamond 8800 e series modules and Summit X450e series switches support 8 slices per 24 port group there can be a maximum of 1024 rules sup...

Page 859: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 859 Platform Availability This command is available only on the BlackDiamond 8800 a...

Page 860: ...namic ACLs from all interfaces do not specify any ports or VLANs Example The following command removes the ACL from port 1 2 unconfigure access list ports 1 2 The following command removes the ACLs fr...

Page 861: ...nd Reference Guide 861 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The VLAN option was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 The egress options was first available in ExtremeWare XOS...

Page 862: ...ACL Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 862...

Page 863: ...rammed by ExtremeWare XOS with bandwidth management and prioritization parameters defined as a QoS profile The bandwidth management and prioritization parameters that modify the forwarding behavior of...

Page 864: ...sion of the software on the BlackDiamond 10808 switch you can also assign parameters to traffic ingressing the switch for minimum and maximum bandwidth and priority queuing to the backplane Beginning...

Page 865: ...nters on a specified traffic queue or on all traffic queues NOTE If you issue the command clear counters with no keywords the system clears all the application counters on the software Example The fol...

Page 866: ...not set per port DiffServ examination code points The default VLAN DiffServ examination mappings apply on ports in more than one VR If you attempt to configure examining DiffServ information on a port...

Page 867: ...800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 867 Example The following command specifies that code point 25 be assigned to QP2 configure diffserv examination code point 25 qosprofile...

Page 868: ...e qosprofile value to configure this parameter The default QoS profile to 802 1p priority value to code point mapping is shown in Table 23 qosprofile Specifies a QoS profile value Specifies the 802 1p...

Page 869: ...ne VR If you attempt to configure replacing DiffServ information on a port that is in more than one virtual router the system returns the following message Warning Port belongs to more than one VR Por...

Page 870: ...re If you attempt to configure 802 1p information on a port that is in more than one virtual router the system returns the following message Warning Port belongs to more than one VR Port properties re...

Page 871: ...ommand Reference Guide 871 Example The following commands reassign from the default the QoS profiles associated with 802 1p priority values 1 and 2 configure dot1p type 2 qosprofile qp2 configure dot1...

Page 872: ...pecified in Kb Mb or Gb The specified burst size will be rounded down to the nearest supported size For GE ports the burst sizes are rounded down to the nearest 32Kb 64Kb 128Kb 256Kb 512Kb 1Mb 2Mb 4Mb...

Page 873: ...owing command configures the ACL meter maximum_bandwidth assigns it a rate of 10 Mbps and sets the out of profile action to drop configure meter maximum_bandwidth committed rate 10 Mbps out action dro...

Page 874: ...ge Guidelines You associate the meter configured with this command with an ACL by specifying the meter name For HQoS or rate limiting enter the peak rate allowed on the ingress queue that allows egres...

Page 875: ...ssign a QoS profile to ports This command applies to egress QoS profiles only the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch and the Summit X450 family of switches support only egress QoS profiles BlackDiamond 1...

Page 876: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 876 Platform Availability This command is availabl...

Page 877: ...rest appropriate multiple based on the port type Use the no limit parameter to Unconfigure egress rate limiting on the port s Reconfigure existing egress rate limiting on the port s The max burst size...

Page 878: ...s and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 878 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Platform Availability This command is available on...

Page 879: ...eak rate To remove the rate limit on egress bandwidth on a port re issue this command using the default values To display the configured committed rate peak rate minimum bandwidth and maximum bandwidt...

Page 880: ...MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 3 QP4 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 4 QP5 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 5 QP6 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 6 QP7 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 7 QP8 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 8 Ingress Rate Shaping Unsupported Ing...

Page 881: ...remaining CoS values are automatically queued You can configure this value from 7 to 2 If you attempt to enter a value other than 2 to 7 the system returns the following error message Error highPriCos...

Page 882: ...an110 Protocol ANY Match all protocols Trunking Load sharing is not enabled EDP Enabled ELSM Disabled Learning Enabled Unicast Flooding Enabled Multicast Flooding Enabled Broadcast Flooding Enabled Ju...

Page 883: ...rence Guide 883 Example The following command sets the high queue to a CoS value of 6 on the ingressing packet on ports 4 2 to 4 10 the other values follow in cascading order configure ports 4 2 10 ra...

Page 884: ...acted from each ingressing packet for calculating the ingress traffic rate traffic utilization and traffic statistics use the show ports port_list information detail command The following is sample ou...

Page 885: ...Pri 3 QP4 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 4 QP5 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 5 QP6 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 6 QP7 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 7 QP8 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 8 Ingress Rate Shaping Unsupported Ingress IPTOS Examin...

Page 886: ...speed minbw Specifies a guaranteed minimum bandwidth for this ingress QoS queue as a percentage of port speed The range is 0 to 100 and the default value is 0 Cumulative percentages of the queue on a...

Page 887: ...y values of 1 to 4 map to the first queue and the priority values of 5 to 8 map to the second queue On the 10G module you have eight ingress queues per port The priority values of 1 to 8 map one to ea...

Page 888: ...inimum bandwidth for this egress QoS queue as a percentage of port speed The range is 0 to 100 and the default value is 0 Cumulative percentages of the queue on a given port should not exceed 100 Perc...

Page 889: ...e following error ERROR Setting minbw maxbw is not supported on MSM G8X I O ports and G48T G48P G24X and 10G4X modules Example The following command configures the egress QoS profile parameters of QoS...

Page 890: ...n command The maxbuffer parameter configures the maximum amount of packet buffer by percentage that the packets associated with the specified QoS profile can consume Regardless of the setting for this...

Page 891: ...Command Reference Guide 891 Example The following command configures the QoS profile parameters of QoS profile QP1 configure qosprofile qp1 maxbuffer 75 weight 4 History This command was first availa...

Page 892: ...l as long as higher priority queues have any remaining packets If you specify weighted round robin the switch services higher weighted queues more frequently but continues to service lower weighted qu...

Page 893: ...queue with an ingress queue Also you must have configured the ingress queue to allow egress shaping prior issuing this command If you issue this command using an ingress only queue the command fails...

Page 894: ...94 Example The following command associates the egress queue tqe with the ingress queue tqs and adds all ports for egress for that association configure traffic ingress queue tqs add egress queue tqe...

Page 895: ...ove the associated egress queue s from the specified ingress queue Example The following command removes all egress queue associations from the ingress queue tqs configure traffic ingress queue tqs de...

Page 896: ...ingress queues that allow egress shaping and egress queues This command creates the aggregate rate limit for the specified queue by associating that queue with the meter containing a peak rate value...

Page 897: ...and the Summit X450 family of switches is none Usage Guidelines Extreme switches support eight QoS profiles QP1 to QP8 for each port NOTE This command applies only to untagged packets on the BlackDiam...

Page 898: ...vMAN as the designated port and the system applies the egress rate limiting profile of the designated port to send flood multicast and broadcast traffic on all ports on that vMAN To display the port y...

Page 899: ...cated NetLogin port u Unauthenticated NetLogin port m Mac Based port Example The following command designates port 5 5 as the port you are using the rate limit profile to control the flooding multicas...

Page 900: ...d is associated with an ACL by specifying the meter name in the action modifier field of the ACL entry The deny keyword should not be an action for the ACL or the packet will be dropped regardless of...

Page 901: ...e command configure qosprofile qosprofile maxbuffer percent weight value to configure the QoS profile once you create it Use the configure ports port_list qosprofile qosprofile command to associate a...

Page 902: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 902 Platform Availability This command is available only on the BlackDiamond 8800 s...

Page 903: ...ssociated with an egress queue To accomplish egress rate limiting on this ingress queue you must create configure and associate an egress queue to a specified ingress queue You can use this ingress qu...

Page 904: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 904 Platform Availability This command is available only on the B...

Page 905: ...ffic was not previously dropped by the associated ingress traffic queue To accomplish ingress and egress HQoS rate limiting you must create and configure an ingress queue that allows egress shaping cr...

Page 906: ...supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 906 Platform Availability This command is available only on the B...

Page 907: ...ream as defined in this queue You cannot perform any egress HQoS on these ingress only queues Strict priority provides a traffic queue with the following three levels of priority high medium and low S...

Page 908: ...Deletes a meter Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes the meter maximum_bandwidth delete meter maximum_bandwidth History This command was availabl...

Page 909: ...the default QoS profiles of QP1 and QP8 If you attempt to delete these QoS profiles the system returns an error All configuration information associated with the specified QoS profile is removed Examp...

Page 910: ...u delete an ingress traffic queue associated with an egress traffic queue the associated egress traffic queue remains Once you have associated an egress queue to an ingress queue you cannot delete the...

Page 911: ...erv feature The default VLAN DiffServ examination mappings apply on ports in more than one VR If you attempt to configure DiffServ 1p information on a port that is in more than one virtual router the...

Page 912: ...LAN DiffServ examinational mappings apply on ports in more than one VR If you attempt to configure DiffServ information on a port that is in more than one virtual router the system returns the followi...

Page 913: ...resources if you re enable this feature those ACL resources are once again unavailable See ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide for information on available ACLs on these platforms Extreme Networks recomme...

Page 914: ...ays happens when you configure the DiffServ traffic grouping BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch only If a port is in more than one virtual router you cannot use the 802 1p feature If you attempt to c...

Page 915: ...rts ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 915 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 916: ...ular switches BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch only If a port is in more than one virtual router you cannot use the DiffServ feature The default VLAN DiffServ examination mappings apply on ports in...

Page 917: ...ds that you also configure 802 1p or port based QoS parameters to ensure that high priority traffic is not dropped prior to reaching the MSM on modular switches NOTE This command affects only that tra...

Page 918: ...ies switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 918 Example The following command enables DiffServ replacement on selected ports enable diffserv replacement ports 5 3 5 5 6 2 History This comm...

Page 919: ...802 1p examination feature if you are not running QoS or are running QoS using DiffServ See ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide for information on ACL limitations on these platforms Use this command to re...

Page 920: ...transmitted is determined by the hardware queue that is used when transmitting the packet NOTE This command affects only that traffic in traffic groupings based on explicit packet class of service in...

Page 921: ...BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 921 Example The following command enables dot1p replacement on all ports enable dot1p replacement ports all History This co...

Page 922: ...e following example displays all the counters the ACL on port 7 1 show access list meter port 2 1 The output of this command is similar to the following ACL Name Vlan Port Committed Max Burst Out of P...

Page 923: ...nd the BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch has 8 default QoS profiles you see different displays depending on the platform BlackDiamond 8800 series switch and Summit X450 family of switches only Follo...

Page 924: ...not take effect Following is sample output from the show diffserv examination command on the BlackDiamond 10808 switch CodePoint QOSProfile mapping 00 QP1 01 QP1 02 QP1 03 QP1 04 QP1 05 QP1 06 QP1 07...

Page 925: ...files and the BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch has 8 default QoS profiles you see different displays depending on the platform BlackDiamond 8800 series switch and Summit X450 family of switches onl...

Page 926: ...OS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 926 Following is sample output from the show dot1p command on the BlackDiamond 10808 switch 802 1p Priority Value QOS Profile 0 QP1 1 QP2 2 QP3 3 QP4 4 QP5 5 QP6 6 QP7...

Page 927: ...50 family of switches only NOTE When you are using a BlackDiamond 8800 series switch or the Summit X450 family of switches you configure a peak rate for QoS meters using the configure meter metername...

Page 928: ...000000 m1_1 1000 m1_10 10000 m1_100 100000 m1_11 11000 m1_12 12000 m1_13 13000 m1_14 14000 m1_145 145000 m1_15 15000 m1_150 150000 m1_16 16000 m1_17 17000 m1_18 18000 m1_19 19000 m1_2 2000 m1_20 20000...

Page 929: ...displayed for all ports If you specify the no refresh parameter the system displays a snapshot of the data at the time you issue the command The toggle functionality does not work with the no refresh...

Page 930: ...P1 IQP2 IQP3 IQP4 IQP5 IQP6 IQP7 IQP8 Pkt Pkt Pkt Pkt Pkt Pkt Pkt Pkt Xmts Xmts Xmts Xmts Xmts Xmts Xmts Xmts 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Spacebar Toggle screen 0 Clear counters U Page up...

Page 931: ...ys per QoS queue Committed rate Peak rate Ingress Specifies ingress queues NOTE This parameter is available only on the BlackDiamond 10808 switch egress Specifies egress queues this is the default val...

Page 932: ...ofile Minimum bandwidth Maximum bandwidth Priority Example The display varies depending on your platform BlackDiamond 8800 a series and e series modules and Summit X450a and X450e series switches only...

Page 933: ...hows sample output for the show qosprofile ingress ports 8 1 command which displays the ingress QoS profiles on a BlackDiamond 10808 10 G port Port 8 1 IQP1 MinBw 0 MaxBw 100 Pri 1 IQP2 MinBw 0 MaxBw...

Page 934: ...your switch as follows Names of traffic queues Direction of traffic queues Allow egress shaping HQoS mode Associated queue meter Example The following command displays the rate limiting configuration...

Page 935: ...Shape Egress No Mode strict priority Queue Meter m1_100 Traffic Queue sample Direction Ingress Shape Egress Yes Mode strict priority Queue Meter m2_200 Traffic Queue iqq2 Direction Ingress Shape Egre...

Page 936: ...figure ports rate limit packet byte adjustment the system calculates uses that byte size to calculate the statistics If you use this command to decrease by 4 the output of the show traffic queue stati...

Page 937: ...331359794 0 0 E Med 904283 78810756 0 0 E Low 7549233 452274980 3790 135288 E 11926270 8622445530 3790 135288 PR aggregate CoS Level for entire traffic queue I Ingress E Egress The following command...

Page 938: ...regated peak rate traffic in each part of the strict priority queues high medium or low The utilization percentage is averaged over a 5 second interval If you issue the command configure ports rate li...

Page 939: ...eue Name D H M L tq2 I 22 15 44 tq3 I 5 7 238 I Ingress E Egress The following command displays HQoS utilization for the specified traffic queue show traffic queue tq2 utilization The following is an...

Page 940: ...DiffServ examination mappings apply on ports in more than one VR If you attempt to configure DiffServ information on a port that is in more than one virtual router the system returns the following mes...

Page 941: ...e rate Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete port based egress rate limiting on the specified ports This command returns the specified ports to run at 100 or line...

Page 942: ...1 Low the lowest priority QP2 2 LowHi QP3 3 Normal QP4 4 NormalHi QP5 5 Medium QP6 6 MediumHi QP7 7 High QP8 8 HighHi highest priority If you do not specify ingress or egress the command returns all...

Page 943: ...s the minimum bandwidth to 0 and the maximum bandwidth to 100 for the specified egressing BlackDiamond 10808 and 12804 switch only the default values for egressing QoS profiles on the BlackDiamond 108...

Page 944: ...ort varies between the 1 Gbps I O module and the 10 Gbps module On the 1 Gbps module you have two ingress queues per port The priority values of 1 to 4 map to the first queue and the priority values o...

Page 945: ...le that controls the flooding traffic for the vMAN with egress rate limiting enabled issue the show vman detail command The following is sample output from this command information is displayed on the...

Page 946: ...mily of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 946 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platform Availability This co...

Page 947: ...access to the switch Extreme switches are also capable of sending RADIUS accounting information You can configure RADIUS accounting servers to be the same as the authentication servers but this is no...

Page 948: ...entries in a specific state Example The following command removes all the declined IP addresses by hosts on the VLAN temporary clear vlan temporary dhcp address allocation all declined History This c...

Page 949: ...nfigures the denial of service protection ACL expiration time Syntax Description Default The default is 5 seconds Usage Guidelines This command configures how long the DoS protection ACL remains in pl...

Page 950: ...the denial of service protection interval Syntax Description Default The default is one second Usage Guidelines This command configures how often the DoS protection counter is monitored Example This...

Page 951: ...chine and we know that we will not get a DoS attack from that machine the port where this machine is connected to can be configured as a trusted port even though a large amount of traffic is going thr...

Page 952: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 952 Platform Availability This command is availa...

Page 953: ...hreshold Syntax Description Default The default is 4000 packets Usage Guidelines This command configures how many packets received in an interval will cause a DoS protection alert When an alert occurs...

Page 954: ...tection notification threshold Syntax Description Default The default is 3500 packets Usage Guidelines This command configures how many packets received in an interval will cause a DoS protection noti...

Page 955: ...sage protocol ICMP and address resolution protocol ARP packets If the limit you configure is greater than the current number of learned entries all the current learned entries are purged Dynamically l...

Page 956: ...it to zero All new source MAC addresses are blackholed Locked entries do not get aged but can be deleted like any other permanent FDB entries The maximum number of permanent lockdown entries is 1024 A...

Page 957: ...c entries and prevents any additional address learning on these ports configure ports 4 5 vlan accounting lock learning The following command removes the learning limit from the specified ports config...

Page 958: ...VRs Use this command to specify RADIUS server information Use of the hostname parameter requires that DNS be enabled The RADIUS server defined by this command is used for user name authentication and...

Page 959: ...your existing RADIUS server configuration Both switch management and network login use the RADIUS authentication server specified in the older configuration Example The following command configures t...

Page 960: ...eywords the secret applies to both the primary or secondary switch management and netlogin RADIUS servers The encrypted keyword is primarily for the output of the show configuration command so the sha...

Page 961: ...00 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 961 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The encrypted keyword was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 The mgmt acce...

Page 962: ...ies the RADIUS server used for switch management authentication The netlogin keyword specifies the RADIUS server used for network login authentication If you do not specify the mgmt access or netlogin...

Page 963: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 963 Platform Availability This command is av...

Page 964: ...r and the RADIUS authentication server can be the same Use of the hostname parameter requires that DNS be enabled Beginning with ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 you can specify one pair of RADIUS accounting serv...

Page 965: ...S accounting server specified in the older configuration Example The following command configures RADIUS accounting on host radius1 using the default UDP port 1813 for use by the RADIUS client on swit...

Page 966: ...ary switch management and netlogin RADIUS accounting servers The encrypted keyword is primarily for the output of the show configuration command so the shared secret is not revealed in the command out...

Page 967: ...nd 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 967 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The encrypted keyword was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 The mgmt...

Page 968: ...S accounting server used for switch management The netlogin keyword specifies the RADIUS accounting server used for network login If you do not specify the mgmt access or netlogin keywords the timeout...

Page 969: ...Appendix A Software Upgrade and Boot Options After you have installed the SSH2 module you must generate a host key and enable SSH2 To generate an SSH2 host key use the configure ssh2 key command To e...

Page 970: ...ether a valid key is present and the TCP port and virtual router that is being used Example The following command generates an authentication key for the SSH2 session configure ssh2 key The command re...

Page 971: ...SHA This command is also used when downloading or uploading the configuration Do not modify the certificate stored in the uploaded configuration file because the certificate is signed using the issuer...

Page 972: ...obtains the pre generated certificate from the user configure ssl certificate pregenerated Next you open the certificate and then copy and paste the certificate into the console Telnet session follow...

Page 973: ...length is approximately 2 kb and the private key length is approximately 3 kb Similar to SSH2 before you can use any SSL commands you must first download and install the separate Extreme Networks SSH...

Page 974: ...Guide 974 Example The following command creates an SSL certificate in the USA for a website called bigcats configure ssl certificate privkeylen 2048 country US organization IEEE common name bigcats H...

Page 975: ...Code MAC algorithms MD5 and SHA The certificate and private key file should be in PEM format and generated using RSA as the cryptography algorithm Similar to SSH2 before you can use any SSL commands...

Page 976: ...ily of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 976 History This command was first available in the ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 and supported with the SSH...

Page 977: ...se the following command unconfigure tacacs server primary secondary Use of the hostname parameter requires that DNS be enabled Example The following command configures server tacacs1 as the primary T...

Page 978: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 978 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Av...

Page 979: ...r the output of the show configuration command so the shared secret is not revealed in the command output Do not use it to set the shared secret Example The following command configures the shared sec...

Page 980: ...vent that the switch still has IP connectivity to the TACACS server but a TCP session cannot be established such as a failed TACACS daemon on the server failover happens immediately regardless of the...

Page 981: ...ng command unconfigure tacacs server primary secondary Example The following command configures server tacacs1 as the primary TACACS accounting server for client switch 10 10 20 35 using a virtual rou...

Page 982: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 982 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Av...

Page 983: ...primarily for the output of the show configuration command so the shared secret is not revealed in the command output Do not use it to set the shared secret Example The following command configures th...

Page 984: ...event that the switch still has IP connectivity to the TACACS accounting server but a TCP session cannot be established such as a failed TACACS daemon on the accounting server failover happens immedia...

Page 985: ...the VLAN s network the range does not contain the VLAN s IP address and the VLAN has an IP address assigned Example The following command allocates the IP addresses between 192 168 0 20 and 192 168 0...

Page 986: ...scription Default N A Usage Guidelines The timer value is specified in seconds The timer value range is 0 4294967295 where 0 indicates the default not configured value of 7200 second Example The follo...

Page 987: ...ure an IP address that is in the VLAN s network range For the other options any IP address is allowed The options below represent the following BOOTP options specified by RFC2132 default gateway Route...

Page 988: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 988 Platform Availability This command is availa...

Page 989: ...le dos protect Description Disables denial of service protection Syntax Description There are no arguments or variables for this command Default Default is disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The f...

Page 990: ...sables DHCP on a specified port in a VLAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables DHCP for port 6 9 in VLAN corp disable dhcp ports 6 9 vlan corp Hi...

Page 991: ...to the attacker and the attacker forwarding that data to the router This allows passwords keys and other information to be intercepted To protect against this type of attack the router will send out i...

Page 992: ...IUS authentication for network login If you do not specify a keyword RADIUS authentication is disabled on the switch for both management and network login Example The following command disables RADIUS...

Page 993: ...disable RADIUS accounting for network login If you do not specify a keyword RADIUS accounting is disabled on the switch for both management and network login Example The following command disables RA...

Page 994: ...o arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines SSH2 options non default port setting are not saved when SSH2 is disabled To view the status of SSH2 on the switch use the show management co...

Page 995: ...tacacs disable tacacs Description Disables TACACS authentication Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables...

Page 996: ...acs accounting disable tacacs accounting Description Disables TACACS accounting Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following co...

Page 997: ...n Description Disables TACACS authorization Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines This disables CLI command authorization but leaves user authentic...

Page 998: ...nstall the separate Extreme Networks SSH software module ssh xmod This additional module allows you to configure both SSH2 and SSL on the switch SSL is packaged with the SSH module therefore if you do...

Page 999: ...ys are not saved across switch reboots unless you save your current switch configuration Once you issue the save command the downloaded certificate is stored in the configuration file and the private...

Page 1000: ...ons This section provides information about the characters supported by the switch for remote filenames When specifying a remote filename the switch permits only the following characters Alphabetical...

Page 1001: ...cross switch reboots unless you save your current switch configuration Once you issue the save command the downloaded certificate is stored in the configuration file and the private key is stored in t...

Page 1002: ...e switch for remote filenames When specifying a remote filename the switch permits only the following characters Alphabetical letters upper case and lower case A Z a z Numerals 0 9 Period Dash Undersc...

Page 1003: ...nable dos protect Description Enables denial of service protection Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default The default is disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The follo...

Page 1004: ...r variables Default The default is disabled Usage Guidelines If simulated denial of service is enabled no ACLs are created This mode is useful to gather information about normal traffic levels on the...

Page 1005: ...Enables DHCP on a specified port in a VLAN Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command enables DHCP for port 5 9 in VLAN corp enable dhcp ports 5 9 vlan cor...

Page 1006: ...router traffic to the attacker and the attacker forwarding that data to the router This allows passwords keys and other information to be intercepted To protect against this type of attack the router...

Page 1007: ...lient ip ipaddress vr vr_name To configure the shared secret use the following command configure radius mgmt access netlogin primary secondary shared secret encrypted string If you do not specify a ke...

Page 1008: ...11 5 Command Reference Guide 1008 The following command enables RADIUS authentication on the switch for network login enable radius netlogin History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS...

Page 1009: ...re the RADIUS accounting servers use the following command configure radius accounting mgmt access netlogin primary secondary server ipaddress hostname tcp_port client ip ipaddress vr vr_name To confi...

Page 1010: ...XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1010 The following command enables RADIUS accounting for network login enable radius accounting netlogin History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10...

Page 1011: ...dule see the instructions in Appendix A Software Upgrade and Boot Options After you have installed the SSH2 module you must generate a host key and enable SSH2 To generate an SSH2 host key use the con...

Page 1012: ...cy config MyAccessProfile_2 pol does not exist on file system If this occurs make sure the policy you want to implement exists on the switch To confirm the policies on the switch use the ls command If...

Page 1013: ...ation Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines After they have been enabled all web and Telnet logins are sent to one of the two TACACS servers f...

Page 1014: ...ing Description Enables TACACS accounting Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If accounting is used the TACACS client must also be enabled E...

Page 1015: ...r variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines When enabled each command is transmitted to the remote TACACS server for authorization before the command is executed TACACS authentication must also be e...

Page 1016: ...ing the module first the switch notifies you to download and install the module To install the module see the instructions in Appendix A Software Upgrade and Boot Options of the ExtremeWare XOS Concep...

Page 1017: ...emeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1017 Platform Availability This command is availa...

Page 1018: ...rs are as follows cipher 3des encryption port 22 compression off debug_level 0 zero vr_name VR Mgmt 3des Specifies that the 3des cipher should be used for encryption This is the default blowfish Speci...

Page 1019: ...dresses When specifying a host name user name or remote IP address the switch permits only the following characters Alphabetical letters upper case and lower case A Z a z Numerals 0 9 Period Dash Perm...

Page 1020: ...meWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1020 The following command copies the configuration file engineering cfg from the switch to host system1 scp2 engineering cfg admin system1 config engineering c...

Page 1021: ...pecified VLAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines If no VLAN is specified the configuration and address allocation for the servers on all the VLANs is displayed Example The following comma...

Page 1022: ...s Using the detail option will also display the following cumulative statistics trusted notify alerts Example The following command displays the DoS protection settings for the switch show dos protect...

Page 1023: ...t detail The following is sample output from this command dos protect is enabled dos protect settings interval 1 measurement interval secs acl expire time 5 secs trusted ports 1 2 type L3 Protect noti...

Page 1024: ...nt access Use the netlogin keyword to only RADIUS configuration details related to network login Example The following command displays the current RADIUS client configuration and statistics for both...

Page 1025: ...ges 0 Access Retransmits 0 Client timeouts 0 Bad authenticators 0 Unknown types 0 Round Trip Time 0 Primary Netlogin Radius server Server name IP address 10 100 1 200 Server IP Port 1812 Client addres...

Page 1026: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1026 Platform Availability This command is avail...

Page 1027: ...ls related to management access Use the netlogin keyword to display only RADIUS accounting configuration details related to network login Example The following command displays RADIUS accounting clien...

Page 1028: ...cct Retransmits 0 Timeouts 0 Primary Netlogin Accounting server Server name IP address 10 100 1 200 Server IP Port 1813 Client address 10 116 3 101 VR Mgmt Shared secret g uovpkkpvi Acct Requests 0 Ac...

Page 1029: ...ad and install the separate Extreme Networks SSH software module ssh xmod This additional module allows you to configure both SSH2 and SSL on the switch SSL is packaged with the SSH module therefore i...

Page 1030: ...not match with the Public Key in the certificate RSA Key Length 1024 Certificate Data Version 1 0x0 Serial Number 6 0x6 Signature Algorithm md5WithRSAEncryption Issuer C AU O CryptSoft Pty Ltd CN Tes...

Page 1031: ...gured to detect and recover from a TACACS server failure Primary TACACS Server Describes information about the primary TACACS server including The name of the primary TACACS server The IP address of t...

Page 1032: ...R Default Shared secret qijxou Secondary TACACS Server Server name IP address 10 201 31 235 Server IP Port 49 Client address 10 201 31 65 VR Default Shared secret qijxou TACACS Acct Server Connect Tim...

Page 1033: ...ut the primary TACACS accounting server including The name of the primary TACACS accounting server The IP address of the primary TACACS accounting server The TCP port to use to contact the primary TAC...

Page 1034: ...he Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1034 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Av...

Page 1035: ...efault N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays the configuration of the DHCP for the VLAN corp show vlan corp dhcp address allocation The following is sample output from this...

Page 1036: ...ines None Example The following command displays the configuration of the DHCP server for the VLAN corp show vlan corp dhcp config The following is sample output from this command DHCP Address Range 1...

Page 1037: ...encryption portnum Specifies the TCP port number to be used for communicating with the SSH2 client The default is port 22 on Specifies that the data is to be compressed off Specifies that compression...

Page 1038: ...or remote IP address the switch permits only the following characters Alphabetical letters upper case and lower case A Z a z Numerals 0 9 Period Dash Permitted for host and user names Underscore _ Pe...

Page 1039: ...of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1039 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Platform Availability This comman...

Page 1040: ...or management functions netlogin Use this keyword to unconfigure only the server s for network login primary Use this keyword to specify only the primary RADIUS sever secondary Use this keyword to spe...

Page 1041: ...d the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1041 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The mgmt access and netlogin keywords were adde...

Page 1042: ...ns netlogin Use this keyword to unconfigure only the accounting server s for network login primary Use this keyword to specify only the primary RADIUS accounting sever secondary Use this keyword to sp...

Page 1043: ...hes and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1043 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The mgmt access and netlogin keywords wer...

Page 1044: ...res the TACACS server configuration Syntax Description Default Unconfigures both the primary and secondary TACACS servers Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures all TACACS se...

Page 1045: ...ccounting server configuration Syntax Description Default Unconfigures both the primary and secondary TACACS accounting servers Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures all TAC...

Page 1046: ...scription Unconfigure all the DHCP configuration information for the specified VLAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures the DHCP server for...

Page 1047: ...ddress range Description Unconfigure the DHCP address range information for the specified VLAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures the DHCP...

Page 1048: ...ptions Description Unconfigure the DHCP option information for the specified VLAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures the DHCP options for t...

Page 1049: ...of DHCP user authentication over the web interface user authentication by MAC address or 802 1x client software and a RADIUS server to provide a user database or specific configuration details Networ...

Page 1050: ...iption Default None Usage Guidelines Clear the states of every MAC learned on this VLAN port and put the port back to unauthenticated state The port will be moved to its original VLAN if configured in...

Page 1051: ...sentially equivalent to a particular supplicant logging out The MAC address will be cleared from the FDB the port is put back to its original VLAN for Campus mode and the port state is set to unauthen...

Page 1052: ...for authentication For example if you associate a MAC address with one or more ports only authentication requests for that MAC addresses received on the port s are sent to the RADIUS server The port s...

Page 1053: ...ure netlogin add mac list 10 20 30 40 50 60 password foo The following example associates MAC address 10 20 30 40 50 70 with ports 2 2 and 2 3 This means authentication requests from MAC address 10 20...

Page 1054: ...r is the Extreme Networks logo Usage Guidelines The banner is a quoted HTML string that will be displayed on the Network Login page The string is limited to 1024 characters This command applies only t...

Page 1055: ...ss net Usage Guidelines When you login using a web browser you are redirected to the specified base URL which is the DNS name for the switch You must configure a DNS name of the type www xx xx xxx or...

Page 1056: ...Login Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete an entry from the MAC address list used for MAC based Network Login Example The following example deletes the MAC addre...

Page 1057: ...t in transmitted packets for Network Login Syntax Description Default The default is v1 Usage Guidelines Although ExtremeWare XOS supports EAPOL version 2 some clients do not yet accept the version 2...

Page 1058: ...e only one guest VLAN per virtual router interface NOTE The supplicant does not move to a guest VLAN if it fails authentication after an 802 1x exchange the supplicant moves to the guest VLAN only if...

Page 1059: ...amond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1059 Example The following example creates a guest VLAN for 802 1x named guest configure netlogin dot1x guest vlan guest History T...

Page 1060: ...ng is a list of sample error messages server timeout ERROR RADIUS server response timeout out of range 1 120 sec quiet period Invalid number detected at marker Input number must be in the range 0 6553...

Page 1061: ...00 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1061 Example The following example changes the 802 1x server timeout to 10 seconds configure netlogin dot1x timers server timeout 10 Histo...

Page 1062: ...LAN and the VLAN ID NOTE Passwords are case sensitive and must have a minimum of 1 character and a maximum of 32 characters You must create a local netlogin account before using this command To create...

Page 1063: ...u attempt to create a password with more than 32 characters the switch displays the following message after you re enter the password Password cannot exceed 32 characters Example This section contains...

Page 1064: ...ged VLAN on the same port authenticate Network login authenticates the first client that requests a move and moves that client to the requested VLAN Network login authenticates the second client but d...

Page 1065: ...port Netlogin now controls these VLANs With netlogin MAC based operation every authenticated client has an additional FDB flag that indicates a translation MAC address If the supplicant s requested VL...

Page 1066: ...n m v 1 11 00 04 96 10 51 91 VLTWO 0051 0100 0000 n m v 1 11 00 04 96 10 51 11 VLTWO 0051 0100 0000 n m 8 1 00 04 96 10 51 31 VLTEN 0051 0100 0000 d m 8 10 Flags d Dynamic s Static p Permanent n NetLo...

Page 1067: ...is command VLAN Interface with name Default created by user Tagging 802 1Q Tag 1 Priority 802 1P Priority 0 Virtual router VR Default STPD s0 Disabled Auto bind Protocol Match all unfiltered protocols...

Page 1068: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1068 Platform Availability This command is available only on the BlackDiamond 8...

Page 1069: ...ng with http or https To support https you must first download and install the separate Extreme Networks SSH software module ssh xmod This additional module allows you to configure both SSH2 and SSL o...

Page 1070: ...igure the VLAN used for unauthenticated clients One VLAN needs to be configured per VR To change the VLAN network login needs to be disabled NetLogin can only be enabled when a VLAN is assigned and no...

Page 1071: ...attached to network login enabled ports Syntax Description Default 10 seconds Usage Guidelines The timer value is specified in seconds This command applies only to the web based authentication mode of...

Page 1072: ...hat local account Extreme Networks recommends creating a maximum of 64 local accounts If you need more than 64 local accounts Extreme Networks recommends using RADIUS for authentication For more infor...

Page 1073: ...tempt to create a password with more than 32 characters the switch displays the following message after you re enter the password Password cannot exceed 32 characters Modifying an Existing Account To...

Page 1074: ...the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1074 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 The vlan vsa parameter and associated options wer...

Page 1075: ...user name you want to delete from the system The show netlogin local users output displays the user name and password in a tabular format This command applies only to web based and MAC based modes of...

Page 1076: ...ation are disabled Usage Guidelines Any combination of authentication types can be disabled on the same switch To enable an authentication mode use the following command enable netlogin dot1x mac web...

Page 1077: ...e only authentication method enabled on the port for movement to guest VLAN A port always moves untagged into the guest VLAN By default the switch attempts to authenticate the supplicant every 30 seco...

Page 1078: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1078 Platform Availability This command is ava...

Page 1079: ...Enabled Usage Guidelines This command controls the logout window pop up on the web based network client This command applies only to the web based authentication mode of network login When disabled th...

Page 1080: ...hat port This command applies to the MAC based web based and 802 1x mode of network login To control which authentication mode is used by Network Login use the following commands enable netlogin dot1x...

Page 1081: ...imeout After the user has been logged in successfully a logout window opens which can be used to close the connection by clicking on the LogOut link Any abnormal closing of this window is detected on...

Page 1082: ...nation of types of authentication can be enabled on the same switch At least one of the authentication types must be specified on the command line To disable an authentication mode use the following c...

Page 1083: ...to guest VLAN A port always moves untagged into the guest VLAN By default the switch attempts to authenticate the supplicant every 30 seconds for a maximum of three tries If the supplicant does not re...

Page 1084: ...y the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1084 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Platform...

Page 1085: ...pop up window Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines This command controls the logout window pop up on the web based network client This command...

Page 1086: ...gin The switch must be configured as a RADIUS client and the RADIUS server must be configured to enable the Extreme Network Login capability For ISP mode login no special conditions are required A RAD...

Page 1087: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1087 Platform Availability This command is ava...

Page 1088: ...and the user is logged out after a time interval as configured for session refresh The session refresh is enabled and set to three minutes by default The value can range from 1 to 255 minutes When you...

Page 1089: ...ys the user configured banner string for network login Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to view the banner that is displayed...

Page 1090: ...isabled The base URL The default redirect page The logout privileges setting The netlogin session refresh setting and time The MAC and IP address of supplicants The type of authentication 802 1x MAC b...

Page 1091: ...3 minutes 802 1x Mode Global Configuration Quiet Period 60 Supplicant Response Timeout 30 Re authentication period 60 RADIUS server timeout 30 EAPOL MPDU version to transmit v1 Guest VLAN destVlan Por...

Page 1092: ...e ReAuth Timer User Port 5 6 Vlan Default State Enabled Authentication mac based Guest Vlan Disabled MAC IP address Auth Type ReAuth Timer User Port 5 7 Vlan Default State Enabled Authentication mac b...

Page 1093: ...Login Authentication Mode web based DISABLED 802 1x ENABLED mac based DISABLED NetLogin VLAN nl NetLogin move fail action Deny 802 1x Mode Global Configuration Quiet Period 30 Supplicant Response Time...

Page 1094: ...ch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1094 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Information about the guest VLAN was added in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Information abo...

Page 1095: ...displays the name of the VLAN and the following information not configured Specifies that you have not associated a VLAN with a local netlogin user Specifies the movement based on the incoming port s...

Page 1096: ...nd the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1096 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 The output was modified to include VLAN inform...

Page 1097: ...ed authentication is VR aware so there is one MAC list per VR Example The following example displays the MAC address list show netlogin mac list The following is sample output from this command MAC Ad...

Page 1098: ...ription Unconfigures a guest VLAN for 802 1x Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to unconfigure the guest VLAN for 802 1x authen...

Page 1099: ...k login Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines This command unconfigures the VLAN used for unauthenticated clients One VLAN needs to be configured p...

Page 1100: ...Network Login Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1100...

Page 1101: ...low is an extension to Access Control Lists ACLs You create ACL policy rules to count packets of interest CLEAR Flow rules are added to the policy to monitor these ACL counter statistics The CLEAR Flo...

Page 1102: ...or variables Default CLEAR Flow is disabled by default Usage Guidelines When the CLEAR Flow agent is disabled sampling stops and the and all rules are left in the current state It will not reset actio...

Page 1103: ...has no arguments or variables Default CLEAR Flow is disabled by default Usage Guidelines When the CLEAR Flow agent is enabled sampling begins and actions are taken based on the CLEAR Flow rules that a...

Page 1104: ...and the number of CLEAR Flow rules Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following display shows output for the command show clea...

Page 1105: ...been triggered Example The following display shows output for the command show clear flow acl modified Policy Name Vlan Name Port Rule Name Default ACL CF Added Actions Actions clearFlow 2 26 acl rul...

Page 1106: ...will be displayed The detail keyword displays detailed information about the rule Example The following display shows output for the command show clear flow port 2 6 Rule Name Type Period Last Rel Thr...

Page 1107: ...t 24 seconds ago Expression evaluation is currently FALSE if DELTA counter1 1000 then PERMIT Allow ACL rule acl rule 3 SYSLOG INFO Delta ruleValue counter counter1 offset counterOffset1 delTime deltaT...

Page 1108: ...ule delta 1 1000 0 11 clearFlow 2 1 rule delta 0 1000 0 4 clearFlow 2 1 rule delta 0 20 0 11 clearFlow 2 1 rule ratio 0 10 0 11 clearFlow 2 1 rule ratio 0 10 0 4 clearFlow 2 26 rule count 9030635 100...

Page 1109: ...y of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1109 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Platform Availability This comm...

Page 1110: ...as been reached Example The following display shows output for the command show clear flow rule triggered Policy Name Vlan Name Port Rule Name Last Value OP Threshold TCNT Sec clearFlow 2 26 rule coun...

Page 1111: ...ode blocks the secondary port for all non control traffic belonging to this EAPS domain If the master node detects a break in the ring it unblocks its secondary port and allows data traffic to be tran...

Page 1112: ...The BlackDiamond 12804 switch with an MSM 5 module or an MSM 5R module ships with a Core license The BlackDiamond 8800 series switch formerly known as Aspen Summit X450 series switch and Summit X450a...

Page 1113: ...the control VLAN By default EAPS protocol data units PDUs are automatically assigned an 802 1p priority of seven With a priority of seven EAPS PDUs take precedence within the EAPS topology thereby giv...

Page 1114: ...VLAN that does not exist the switch displays a message similar to the following Switch 8 configure eaps megtest add control foo Invalid input detected at marker To create the VLAN use the create vlan...

Page 1115: ...be tagged except in the case of the default VLAN As long as the ring is complete the master node blocks the protected VLANs on its secondary port NOTE If the protected VLAN has a QoS profile of QP8 ma...

Page 1116: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1116 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Avai...

Page 1117: ...arameters the switch displays loop protection warning messages Adding EAPS primary or secondary ring ports to a VLAN Deleting a protected VLAN Disabling the global EAPS setting on the switch Disabling...

Page 1118: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1118 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platform Avai...

Page 1119: ...ommand You configure the warning message display on a per switch basis not per EAPS domain When configuring the following EAPS parameters the switch displays loop protection warning messages Adding EA...

Page 1120: ...letes the specified control VLAN from the specified EAPS domain Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes the control VLAN keys from the EAPS domain ea...

Page 1121: ...nce with EAPS you might find the EAPS loop protection warning messages unnecessary For more information see the configure eaps config warnings off command on page 1117 Useful show Commands Use the fol...

Page 1122: ...ing message and prompts you to confirm this action WARNING Make sure EAPS ring ports are deleted from the VLAN first Otherwise deleting the VLAN from the EAPS domain could cause a loop in the network...

Page 1123: ...reasing the failtime value provides more protection by waiting longer to receive a health check packet when the network is congested NOTE You configure the action taken when the failtimer expires by u...

Page 1124: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1124 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1125: ...he user that there is a fault in the ring An SNMP trap is also sent If the EAPS ring contains non EAPS devices you must use the open secondary port parameter NOTE Use caution when setting the failtime...

Page 1126: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1126 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1127: ...APS with fast convergence turned on If fast convergence is turned on it will be displayed under the show eaps command For example show eaps EAPS Enabled No EAPS Fast Convergence Off Number of EAPS ins...

Page 1128: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1128 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Avai...

Page 1129: ...e the polling timers for a transit node those values are ignored If you later reconfigure that transit node as the master node the polling timer values is used as the current values If you are running...

Page 1130: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1130 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1131: ...he EAPS domain Notify you that changing a master node to a transit node might cause a loop in the network If you have not assigned a new master node before changing the current master node to a transi...

Page 1132: ...ng message and prompts you to confirm this action WARNING Make sure this specific EAPS domain has a Master node in the ring If you change this node from EAPS master to EAPS transit you could cause a l...

Page 1133: ...me across categories for example STPD and EAPS names Extreme Networks recommends that you specify the identifying keyword as well as the actual name If you do not use the keyword the system may return...

Page 1134: ...or secondary port that is a member of a load shared group you do not need to disable your EAPS domain and remove that ring port when modifying the load shared group For more information about configur...

Page 1135: ...and or add ports that the EAPS domain does not use as primary or secondary ring ports If you have considerable knowledge and experience with EAPS you might find the EAPS loop protection warning messag...

Page 1136: ...have that link ID If you have multiple adjacent common links Extreme Networks recommends that you configure the link IDs in ascending order of adjacency For example if you have an EAPS configuration...

Page 1137: ...common link must be configured to be the partner This end does not participate in any form of blocking It is responsible only for sending and receiving health check messages Example The following com...

Page 1138: ...Using this configuration if the controller or partner node loses three consecutive hello PDUs the failtimer will expire but there may not be a break in the segment Opening a blocked port in this situa...

Page 1139: ...from the partner or controller respectively The segment timer expires and the expiry action was set to segment down This means that either the controller or partner did not receive health check messag...

Page 1140: ...identifies the EAPS domain to be created If you use the same name across categories for example STPD and EAPS names Extreme Networks recommends that you specify the identifying keyword as well as the...

Page 1141: ...switch Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines To configure a common link you must create a shared port on each switch on either end of the common link Example The following command creates a...

Page 1142: ...ete eaps name Description Deletes the EAPS domain with the specified name Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes EAPS domain eaps_1 delete eaps eaps...

Page 1143: ...d port ports Description Deletes an EAPS shared port on a switch Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes shared port 1 1 delete eaps shared port 1 1...

Page 1144: ...more information see the configure eaps config warnings off command on page 1117 BlackDiamond 8800 Series Switch and Summit X450 Family of Switches Only If you configure EAPS spatial reuse and disabl...

Page 1145: ...o confirm this action WARNING Disabling specific EAPS domain could cause a loop in the network Are you sure you want to disable this specific EAPS domain y n Enter y to disable the EAPS function for t...

Page 1146: ...assign the name 2 Configure the control VLAN 3 Configure the protected VLAN s 4 Add the control VLAN to EAPS domain 5 Add the protected VLAN s to EAPS domain 6 Configure EAPS mode master or transit 7...

Page 1147: ...being forwarded through out the domain thereby causing the master node s fail timer to expire If this occurs make sure the EAPS domain is enabled on all of the transit nodes To confirm the current sta...

Page 1148: ...e values are different on a transit node than on a master node The fields displayed are as follows eapsDomain Specifies the name of an EAPS domain detail Specifies all available detail for each domain...

Page 1149: ...e and has sent a request to lower hardware layers to block the secondary port It is in transient state waiting for acknowledgement from the hardware layer indicating the operation is completed Failtim...

Page 1150: ...ansmissions of health check packets Fail Timer interval The configured value of the timer in seconds specifying the time that the master node waits before the failtimer expires Failtimer expiry action...

Page 1151: ...6 16 p_17 17 p_18 18 p_19 19 p_20 20 p_21 21 p_22 22 p_23 23 p_24 24 p_25 25 p_26 26 p_27 27 p_28 28 p_29 29 p_30 30 NOTE You may see a slightly different display depending on whether you display the...

Page 1152: ...main to EAPS shared ports This is particularly useful when planning your EAPS configuration NOTE The order you add EAPS domains to EAPS shared ports is relevant if the EAPS domains have matching ring...

Page 1153: ...sharing the common link VLAN Count Indicates the total number of VLANs that are protected under the EAPS domains sharing this common link Nbr Yes Indicates that the EAPS instance on the other end of t...

Page 1154: ...ain available with the detail keyword or by specifying a shared port The EAPS domain having the segment port as one of its ring ports Vlan port count available with the detail keyword or by specifying...

Page 1155: ...ready state EAPS shared port count 1 Link Domain Vlan RB RB Shared port Mode Id Up State count count Nbr State Id 10 1 Controller 1 Y Ready 2 1 Yes None None Segment Timer expiry action Send alert Th...

Page 1156: ...ch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1156 Vlan p_1 Vlan port count 2 Active Open None Segment Port Virtual port Status 5 7 Blocked 2 11 Open History This command was first available in Extr...

Page 1157: ...tner VLAN for an EAPS domain This command also displays if the VLAN is not a member of any EAPS domain If a VLAN is a partner VLAN for more than one EAPS domain all of the EAPS domains that the VLAN i...

Page 1158: ...ference Guide 1158 The following command displays information about the VLAN default not participating in EAPS show vlan default eaps The following is sample output from this command Vlan has not been...

Page 1159: ...nk id Description Unconfigures an EAPS link ID on a shared port on the switch Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures the link ID on shared port...

Page 1160: ...e Description Unconfigures the EAPS shared port mode Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures the shared port mode on port 1 1 unconfigure eaps s...

Page 1161: ...to unconfigure the specified port Enter n or press Return to cancel this action If you have considerable knowledge and experience with EAPS you might find the EAPS loop protection warning messages unn...

Page 1162: ...s and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1162 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 The interactive messages were added in Extr...

Page 1163: ...Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w provides an enhanced spanning tree algorithm that improves the convergence speed of bridged networks RSTP takes advantage of point to point links in the...

Page 1164: ...ed to transport Extreme Multiple Instance Spanning Tree Protocol EMISTP or Per VLAN Spanning Tree PVST encapsulated Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Only one carrier VLAN can exist in a given STPD alt...

Page 1165: ...int to point links and when you configure the peer in MSTP or 802 1w mode If you do not select point to point links and the peer is not configured in 802 1w mode the STPD fails back to 802 1D mode You...

Page 1166: ...itch prevents you from configuring EMISTP or PVST encapsulation mode for MSTP STPDs STP Rules and Restrictions This section summarizes the rules and restrictions for configuring STP as follows The car...

Page 1167: ...ckDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1167 In an MSTP environment A VLAN can belong to either a CIST or one of the MSTIs A VLAN can belong to only one MSTP domain M...

Page 1168: ...s diagnostics Clears the internal diagnostic counters domains Clears the domain level counters ports Clears the counters for all ports and leaves the domain level counters Viewing and maintaining stat...

Page 1169: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1169 Platform Availability This command is avail...

Page 1170: ...Us The default is 0 Revision Level This identifier is reserved for future use however the switch uses and displays a default of 3 You can configure only one MSTP region on the switch at any given time...

Page 1171: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1171 Platform Availability This command is ava...

Page 1172: ...MSTP region you must configure each switch in the region with the same MSTP configuration attributes also known as MSTP region identifiers These identifiers consist of the following Region Name The n...

Page 1173: ...PDUs sent in the MSTP region and the reserved MSTP revision level If configured the output also displays the name of the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST and the number of Multiple Spanning Tree...

Page 1174: ...this command remember that each switch in the region must have the same MSTP configuration attributes also known as MSTP region identifiers These identifiers consist of the following Region Name The...

Page 1175: ...set of ports You can also specify the encapsulation mode for those ports In an MSTP environment you do not need a carrier VLAN A CIST controls the connectivity of interconnecting MSTP regions and send...

Page 1176: ...rsions BPDUs are sent untagged in 802 1D mode Because of this any given physical interface can have only one STPD running in 802 1D mode This encapsulation mode supports the following STPD modes of op...

Page 1177: ...ically binds that port to the CIST The CIST handles BPDU processing for itself and all of the MSTIs therefore the CIST must inherit ports from the MSTIs in order to transmit and receive BPDUs You can...

Page 1178: ...2 1D BPDU encapsulation mode by default To ensure correct operation of your MSTP STPDs do not configure EMISTP or PVST encapsulation mode for MSTP STPDs Naming Conventions If your STPD has the same na...

Page 1179: ...assign the StpdID when configuring the domain An StpdID must be identical to the VLANid of the carrier VLAN in that STP domain and that VLAN cannot belong to another STPD MSTP uses two different meth...

Page 1180: ...PVST environments if the specified VLAN is the carrier VLAN all protected VLANs on the same set of ports are also removed from the STPD You also use this command to remove autobind ports from a VLAN E...

Page 1181: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1181 Platform Availability This command is a...

Page 1182: ...recommends that you specify the identifying keyword as well as the name If your STPD has a name unique only to that STPD the keyword stpd is optional You should not configure any STP parameters unless...

Page 1183: ...word as well as the name If your STPD has a name unique only to that STPD the keyword stpd is optional In an MSTP environment configure the hello timer only on the CIST not on the MSTIs You should not...

Page 1184: ...is optional You should not configure any STP parameters unless you have considerable knowledge and experience with STP The default STP parameters are adequate for most networks In an MSTP environment...

Page 1185: ...range for the hopcount parameter is 6 through 40 hops In an MSTP environment the hop count has the same purpose as the maxage timer for 802 1D and 802 1w environments The main responsibility of the C...

Page 1186: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1186 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platform Availab...

Page 1187: ...If you configure the STP domain in MSTP mode the rapid reconfiguration mechanism is enabled You enable or disable MSTP on a per STPD basis only You do not enable MSTP on a per port basis MSTP STPDs u...

Page 1188: ...gures STPD s1 to enable the rapid reconfiguration mechanism and operate in 802 1w mode configure stpd s1 mode dot1w The following command configures STPD s2 to operate as an MSTI in an MSTP domain con...

Page 1189: ...default STP parameters are adequate for most networks The range for the cost parameter is 1 through 65 535 The switch automatically assigns a default path cost based on the speed of the port If you co...

Page 1190: ...5 Command Reference Guide 1190 Example The following command configures a cost of 100 to slot 2 ports 1 through 5 in STPD s0 configure stpd s0 ports cost 100 2 1 2 5 History This command was availabl...

Page 1191: ...no longer transmits BPDUs unless a BPDU is received by that edge port This is the default behavior To view the status of the edge safeguard feature use the show stpd stpd_name ports detail port_list d...

Page 1192: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1192 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platform Availab...

Page 1193: ...Edge safeguard also limits the impact of broadcast storms that might occur on edge ports An edge port configured with edge safeguard immediately enters the forwarding state and transmits BPDUs This a...

Page 1194: ...are XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1194 The following command enables edge safeguard on the RSTP edge port on slot 2 port 3 in STPD S1 on a modular switch configure stpd s1 ports edge safeguard enab...

Page 1195: ...nfigure the same link types for the CIST and all MSTIs stpd_name Specifies an STPD name on the switch auto Specifies the switch to automatically determine the port link type An auto link behaves like...

Page 1196: ...eliberate misconfigurations loops resulting from connecting two edge ports together or by connecting a hub or other non STP switch to an edge port Edge safeguard also limits the impact of broadcast st...

Page 1197: ...TP encapsulation modes dot1d This mode is reserved for backward compatibility with previous STP versions BPDUs are sent untagged in 802 1D mode Because of this any given physical interface can have on...

Page 1198: ...witch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1198 Example The following command configures STPD s1 with PVST packet formatting for slot 2 port 1 configure stpd s1 ports mode pvst plus 2 1 Histor...

Page 1199: ...d stpd is optional You should not configure any STP parameters unless you have considerable knowledge and experience with STP The default STP parameters are adequate for most networks By changing the...

Page 1200: ...etworks By changing the priority of the STPD you can make it more or less likely to become the root bridge The range for the priority parameter is 0 through 65 535 A setting of 0 indicates the highest...

Page 1201: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1201 Platform Availability This command is av...

Page 1202: ...D with ports running in either EMISTP mode or PVST mode must be configured with an StpdID You must create and configure the VLAN along with the tag before you can configure the STPD tag To create a VL...

Page 1203: ...ly the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1203 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Avai...

Page 1204: ...set of ports You can also specify the encapsulation mode for those ports In an MSTP environment you do not need a carrier VLAN A CIST controls the connectivity of interconnecting MSTP regions and send...

Page 1205: ...on 802 1D 802 1w and MSTP emistp This mode sends BPDUs with an 802 1Q tag having an StpdID in the VLANid field This encapsulation mode supports the following STPD modes of operation 802 1D and 802 1w...

Page 1206: ...ches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1206 History This command was available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The nobroadcast keyword was removed in Extreme...

Page 1207: ...mode 802 1D Rapid Root Failover disabled Default Binding Mode encapsulation mode Ports in the default STPD s0 are in 802 1d mode Ports in user created STPDs are in emistp mode Maximum hop count when...

Page 1208: ...when configuring the STPD If you do not specify the appropriate keyword the switch displays a message similar to the following Ambiguous command configure Test To view the names of the STPDs on the sw...

Page 1209: ...do not specify the stpd keyword an error message similar to the following is displayed Ambiguous command delete Test In this example to delete the STPD Test enter delete stpd Test If you created an ST...

Page 1210: ...a unique name the keyword stpd is optional If you want to disable the STP protocol for all STPDs do not specify an STPD name In an MSTP environment you cannot delete or disable a CIST if any of the MS...

Page 1211: ...orts already in the STPD remain in that domain as if they were added manually If you create an STPD and a VLAN with unique names the keywords stpd and vlan are optional Ports added to the STPD automat...

Page 1212: ...ts are disregarded and dropped Use the all keyword to specify that all ports of a given STPD are disabled Use the port_list parameter to specify a list of ports of a given STPD are disabled If you do...

Page 1213: ...operating in 802 1D After you have created the STPD with a unique name the keyword stpd is optional To view the status of rapid root failover on the switch use the show stpd command The show stpd comm...

Page 1214: ...e STP protocol for one or all STPDs Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If you want to enable the STP protocol for all STPDs do not specify an STPD name Example The following command...

Page 1215: ...abled In addition any port or list of ports that you remove from a carrier VLAN are automatically removed from the STPD This allows the STPD to increase or decrease its span as you add ports to or rem...

Page 1216: ...t transmit or receive STP BPDUs but they are affected by STP state changes communicated by the CIST to the MSTP regions MSTIs cannot share the same protected VLAN however any port in a protected VLAN...

Page 1217: ...of operation for the STPD Specify the priority for the CIST Assign the VLAN Default to the CIST Configure the port link type Enable the CIST The following example enables autobind on the VLAN Default...

Page 1218: ...ciated STPD You must configure one or more STPDs before you can use the enable stpd ports command To create an STPD use the create stpd stpd_name command If you have considerable knowledge and experie...

Page 1219: ...r STPDs operating in 802 1D If you create an STPD with a unique name the keyword stpd is optional To view the status of rapid root failover on the switch use the show stpd command The show stpd comman...

Page 1220: ...etected The STPD has detected a change in the network topology M MSTP CIST The STPD has been configured for MSTP and the STPD is the common and internal spanning tree I MSTP MSTI The STPD has been con...

Page 1221: ...ou have MSTP configured the command also displays the following information Bridge role CIST root CIST regional root MSTI instances Master port Displayed only on MSTI STPDs If your STPD has the same n...

Page 1222: ...nated root 0a be 00 01 30 28 b7 00 RootPathCost 19 Root Port 28 MaxAge 20s HelloTime 2s ForwardDelay 15s CfgBrMaxAge 20s CfgBrHelloTime 2s CfgBrForwardDelay 15s Topology Change Time 35s Hold time 1s T...

Page 1223: ...XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1223 Number of Topology Changes 0 Time Since Last Topology Change 0s Participating Vlans none Auto bind Vlans Default History This command was available in ExtremeWare...

Page 1224: ...t role root designated alternate and so on STPD port state forwarding blocking and so on Configured port link type Operational port link type Edge port settings inconsistent behavior edge safeguard se...

Page 1225: ...3 2 802 1D FORWARDING 100 e 16 16642 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 3 802 1D FORWARDING 100 e 16 16643 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Total Ports 3 Flags 1 e Enable d Disable 2 Port role R Root D Designated A Al...

Page 1226: ...FORWARDING Topology Change Ack FALSE Port Priority 16 Designated Root 80 00 00 04 96 1f a8 44 Designated Cost 0 IntCost 0 Designated Bridge 80 00 00 04 96 1f a8 44 Designated Port Id 8001 Partner STP...

Page 1227: ...ated alternate and so on STPD port state forwarding blocking and so on Configured port link type Operational port link type If your VLAN has the same name as another component for example an STPD Extr...

Page 1228: ...4 e 16 8002 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 3 802 1D DISABLED 4 e 16 8003 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 1 4 802 1D LEARNING 4 eDbb d 16 8004 80 00 00 01 30 94 79 00 1 5 802 1D LEARNING 4 eDbb d 16 8005 80 00 00 0...

Page 1229: ...IST and any active MSTIs After you issue this command all of the MSTP settings return to their default values as described below Region Name This indicates the name of the MSTP region In the Extreme N...

Page 1230: ...ge Guidelines If you create an STPD with a unique name the keyword stpd is optional Use this command to restore default STP values to a particular STPD If you want to restore default STP values on all...

Page 1231: ...ust enter the stpd keyword to specify the STPD If your STPD has a name unique only to that STPD the keyword stpd is optional If the switch operates in 802 1D mode any configured port link type will be...

Page 1232: ...STP Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1232...

Page 1233: ...ESRP groups more than two switches can provide redundant Layer 2 or Layer 3 services to a single vlan The switches exchange keep alive packets for each VLAN independently Only one switch the master c...

Page 1234: ...meWare XOS Concepts Guide ESRP Modes of Operation ExtremeWare XOS has two modes of ESRP operation standard and extended Select standard if your network contains some switches running ExtremeWare other...

Page 1235: ...s a feature of ExtremeWare XOS that allows you to prevent detect and recover from Layer 2 loops in the network You can use ELRP with other protocols such as ESRP With ELRP each switch except for the s...

Page 1236: ...tch waits for ESRP to initialize and run A neutral switch does not participate in ESRP elections PreMaster The pre master state is an ESRP switch that is ready to be master but is going through possib...

Page 1237: ...lackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1237 Example The following command clears the statistics gathered by ESRP clear esrp counters History This command was first...

Page 1238: ...sting neighbor information for the ESRP domain After the switch is up running and configured as an ESRP aware or ESRP enabled device new neighbor information is learned Before using this command sched...

Page 1239: ...network interruptions To prevent this use the configure esrp election policy and select stickiness as an election algorithm If you use sticky as an election metric and an event causes the ESRP master...

Page 1240: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1240 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1241: ...enabled Usage Guidelines This command allows you to configure the ports in your network that might experience loops such as ports that connect to master slave or ESRP aware switches to receive ELRP p...

Page 1242: ...n a pair of ESRP enabled switches Contains the total number of active physical ports that are counted when determining the master ESRP domain The switch with the highest number of active ports takes p...

Page 1243: ...main contains one master and zero or more member VLANs Master VLANs can have their own set of ports and member VLANs can have a different set of ports The state of the ESRP device determines whether t...

Page 1244: ...ave mode The range of the priority value is 0 to 254 Setting the priority to 255 configures the switch to slave mode and to be ineligible to become the master The switch will remain in slave mode even...

Page 1245: ...ed Usage Guidelines The track ip metric consists of the total number of tracked IP routes that are up or functional An ESRP domain can track eight IP routes Example The following command enables IP ro...

Page 1246: ...s and traced routes to track an external gateway An ESRP domain can track eight stations Example The following command enables ping tracking for the external gateway at 10 207 29 17 pinging every 10 s...

Page 1247: ...LAN being tracked by the ESRP domain If more than one VLAN shares a physical link each VLAN counts the physical link The ESRP switch should have a higher priority number than its neighbors to ensure m...

Page 1248: ...ports on an ESRP domain you do not need to send ELRP packets to those ports If you change your network configuration and a port no longer connects to a master slave or ESRP aware switch you can disabl...

Page 1249: ...the disable esrp esrpDomain command If you attempt to remove the master VLAN before disabling the ESRP domain the switch displays an error message similar to the following ERROR Failed to delete maste...

Page 1250: ...Deletes a member VLAN from the specified ESRP domain Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes the member VLAN green from the ESRP domain esrp1 configu...

Page 1251: ...track environment Description Disables environmental failure tracking for an ESRP domain Syntax Description Default No environmental tracking Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disabl...

Page 1252: ...d route the ESRP domain recovers from the forced standby state If you disable route tracking for a route that is up and functional there is no impact on the ESRP state Example The following command di...

Page 1253: ...ing Usage Guidelines If you disable ping tracking for a failed ping the ESRP domain recovers from the forced standby state If you disable route tracking for a successful ping there is no impact on the...

Page 1254: ...a specified VLAN Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If you delete a VLAN that is down the ESRP domain recovers from the forced standby state Example The following command disables t...

Page 1255: ...e tagged master VLAN If you do not have a domain ID you cannot enable ESRP on that domain Each switch participating in ESRP for a particular domain must have the same domain ID configured The number p...

Page 1256: ...main should consider election factors in the following order ESRP priority active ports tracking information MAC address priority track ports mac Specifies that this ESRP domain should consider electi...

Page 1257: ...as don t count ports regardless of ESRP running in extended or standard mode The election algorithm must be the same on all switches for a particular ESRP domain The election algorithms that use stic...

Page 1258: ...new election algorithm If you attempt to change the election algorithm without disabling the domain first an error message appears To disable the ESRP domain use the following command disable esrp es...

Page 1259: ...mining the ESRP master switch for ESRP domain esrp1 configure esrp esrp1 election policy track ports priority mac History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 The default election...

Page 1260: ...Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines Use this command to disable the use of ELRP by ESRP in the master state When you disable ELRP the ESRP master switch no longer transmits ELRP PDUs to det...

Page 1261: ...etworks recommends that you enable both premaster and master polling when using ELRP with ESRP To enable premaster polling use the configure esrp esrpDomain elrp premaster poll enable count count inte...

Page 1262: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1262 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Platform Avai...

Page 1263: ...Disabled Usage Guidelines Use this command to disable the use of ELRP by ESRP in the pre master state When you disable ELRP in the pre master state the ESRP pre master switch no longer transmits ELRP...

Page 1264: ...times If there is a loop in the network the transmitted PDUs are received by the switch If this happens the ESRP pre master switch does not transition to the master state rather the switch transition...

Page 1265: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1265 Example The following command enables the use of ELRP with the default settings in the pre master state on ESRP domain elrp1 configure esrp elrp1 esrp el...

Page 1266: ...for multiple ESRP groups is when two or more sets of ESRP switches are providing fast failover protection within a common subnet for two or more groups of users An additional use for ESRP groups is E...

Page 1267: ...tremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1267 Platform Availability This command is avai...

Page 1268: ...50 family switch running ExtremeWare XOS select standard ESRP By selecting standard the switch running ExtremeWare XOS is backward compatible with the ExtremeWare implementation of ESRP If you use the...

Page 1269: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1269 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform A...

Page 1270: ...Names can contain alphanumeric characters and underscores _ but cannot be any reserved keywords for example esrp Names must start with an alphabetical character for example a Z You can rename an ESRP...

Page 1271: ...orts directly attached to the slave s hosts to communicate with other hosts that are connected to the master If you use load sharing with the ESRP HA feature configure the load sharing group first and...

Page 1272: ...no restart Description Disables port restart for a port Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables port restart for ports 7 9 in slot 3 in the ESRP mas...

Page 1273: ...ownstream devices to remove the ports from their FDB tables After 3 seconds the ports re establish connection with the ESRP enabled device This feature allows you to use ESRP in networks that include...

Page 1274: ...a mirroring software controlled redundant port or a Netlogin port For load shared ports configure one master port in the load share group with the port weight A single command specifies the weight for...

Page 1275: ...t ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1275 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 1276: ...ining criteria for the election algorithm the highest priority value determines which switch will act as master for a particular ESRP domain Setting the priority to 255 configures the switch to slave...

Page 1277: ...hello settings use the show esrp name command The seconds range is 1 to 255 If your configuration contains more than 2 000 ESRP VLANs and 256 000 FDB entries Extreme Networks recommends a timer setti...

Page 1278: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1278 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1279: ...ral timeout 2 hello premaster timeout 3 hello The seconds range is 3 hello to 1024 seconds To view the neighbor timer settings use the show esrp name command In a large ESRP configuration the slave ES...

Page 1280: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1280 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Avai...

Page 1281: ...e entering the slave state The neutral value must be at least 2 times the hello timer value Entering a value outside of that range generates an error message similar to the following operation Failed...

Page 1282: ...de of that range generates an error message similar to the following operation Failed Valid timer relationship neighbor timeout 3 hello neutral timeout 2 hello premaster timeout 3 hello The seconds ra...

Page 1283: ...er ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1283 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 1284: ...e during a hitless failover This timer prevent the slave ESRP switch from trying to become master during a hitless failover The seconds range is 15 1024 To view the restart settings use the show esrp...

Page 1285: ...te tracking none Usage Guidelines The maximum length for a name is 32 characters Names can contain alphanumeric characters and underscores _ but cannot be any reserved keywords for example esrp Names...

Page 1286: ...an Advanced Core license you can configure switches as ESRP aware or with full ESRP functionality If you need an ESRP aware switch do not enable the ESRP domain For more information about configuring...

Page 1287: ...P domain before you delete it To disable an ESRP domain use the disable esrp command You do not have to remove the master or member VLANs from an ESRP domain before you delete it When you delete an ES...

Page 1288: ...sable an ESRP domain the switch notifies its neighbor that the ESRP domain is going down and the neighbor clears its neighbor table If the master switch receives this information it enters the neutral...

Page 1289: ...and 802 1Q tag VLANid of the tagged master VLAN If you do not have a domain ID you cannot enable ESRP on that domain A message similar to the following appears ERROR Cannot enable ESRP Domain esrp1 No...

Page 1290: ...isplayed This includes information about the master and pre master states number of transitions to the pre master state and the ports where ELRP is disabled The output varies depending upon the config...

Page 1291: ...tif Virtual Mac 00 e0 2b 00 00 80 IP Address 2 2 2 3 Election Policy standby sticky ports weight track priority mac This System Neighbor system State Slave Active Ports 1 Tracked Active Vlan Ports 0 T...

Page 1292: ...rence Guide 1292 Temperature WARNING Domain Member VLANs VLAN Name VID Virtual IP IPX State m_vlan1 1001 0 0 0 0 DOWN m_vlan2 1002 0 0 0 0 DOWN m_vlan3 1003 0 0 0 0 DOWN History This command was first...

Page 1293: ...lid Extreme Encapsulation Protocol EEP data Dropped packets due to old sequence numbers Dropped packets due to an invalid 802 1Q tag Dropped packets because the packet length was truncated packet leng...

Page 1294: ...esrpStatsWrongDigest 0 The following command displays counter information for ESRP domain ed5 show esrp ed5 counters The following is sample output from this command Domain ed5 Current time Sun Nov 16...

Page 1295: ...P routers should not be used except when VRRP routers have hosts directly attached A maximum of 64 VRID instances are supported on the router Up to 7 unique VRIDs can be configured on an interface VRI...

Page 1296: ...tionality is not available with an Edge license The BlackDiamond 10808 switch with an MSM 1 module or an MSM1 XL module ships with a Core or Advanced Core license respectively The BlackDiamond 12804 s...

Page 1297: ...parameter statistics for all VRRP VLANs are cleared If you specify only VLAN name statistics for all VRRP VRIDs on that VLAN are cleared If you specify VLAN name and VRRP VRID only statistics for that...

Page 1298: ...priority is not 255 the IP address must not be owned by that VLAN When a VRRP virtual router is enabled it must have at least one virtual IP address Example Create a VLAN named vlan 1 with an ipaddres...

Page 1299: ...lines The route specified in this command may not exist in the IP routing table When you create the entry for a route an immediate VRRP failover may occur Example The following command enables IP rout...

Page 1300: ...entry s frequency and miss number Example The following command enables ping tracking for the external gateway at 3 1 0 1 pinging every 3 seconds and considering the gateway to be unreachable if no re...

Page 1301: ...iption Default N A Usage Guidelines Up to eight VLANs can be tracked Deleting a tracked VLAN does not constitute a failover event for the VR tracking it and the tracking entry will be deleted Example...

Page 1302: ...need to specify the seconds keyword to configure the advertisement interval in seconds The milliseconds range is 100 through 999 Since the switch uses the seconds interval by default you must specify...

Page 1303: ...conds 999 out of range If you configure an out of range milliseconds interval the switch displays an error message similar to the following configure vrrp blue vrid 2 advertisement interval 1000 milli...

Page 1304: ...amount of security to VRRP advertisements All VRRP routers using the same VRID must use the same password when using this feature A simple password must be between 1 and 8 characters long Example The...

Page 1305: ...owned by the VLAN on which the VR exists If the priority is not 255 the IP address must not be owned by that VLAN When a VR is enabled it must have at least one virtual IP address When the VR is not e...

Page 1306: ...ry while VRRP is enabled causes the VRRP VRs state to be re evaluated for failover Example The following command disables tracking of routes to the specified subnet for VLAN vlan 1 configure vrrp vlan...

Page 1307: ...with a priority of 255 may not recover from a ping tracking failure if there is a Layer 2 switch between it and another VRRP node In cases where a Layer 2 switch is used to connect VRRP nodes Extreme...

Page 1308: ...Guidelines Deleting a tracking entry while VRRP is enabled will cause the VRRP VRs state to be re evaluated for failover Example The following command disables the tracking of port connectivity to VLA...

Page 1309: ...setting is preempt Usage Guidelines The preempt mode controls whether a higher priority backup router preempts a lower priority master dont preempt prohibits preemption The router that owns the virtu...

Page 1310: ...reempt Usage Guidelines The preempt mode controls whether a higher priority backup router preempts a lower priority master preempt allows preemption The router that owns the virtual IP address always...

Page 1311: ...ed by switch the priority cannot be changed to 255 To change the priority in either of the described cases disable VRRP and remove the virtual IP address es first To disable VRRP use the disable vrrp...

Page 1312: ...rst create the VRRP instance on the switch If you define VRRP parameters before creating the VRRP you may see an error similar to the following Error VRRP VR for vlan vrrp1 vrid 1 does not exist Pleas...

Page 1313: ...cified VRRP virtual router Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes the VRRP virtual router on the VLAN vrrp 1 identified by VRID 2 delete vrrp vlan v...

Page 1314: ...Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This disables a specific virtual router on the switch If no VRRP VLAN is specified all virtual routers on the switch are disabled Example The following comman...

Page 1315: ...escription Default N A Usage Guidelines This enables a specific virtual router on the device If you do not specify a VRRP virtual router all VRRP virtual routers on this device are enabled Example The...

Page 1316: ...ual Router Identification number for the VRRP VLAN Pri The priority value of the VRRP VLAN Virtual IP Addr If configured the virtual IP address associated with the VRRP VLAN State The current state of...

Page 1317: ...he Target IP address you are pinging Number of seconds between pings to the target IP address Number of misses allowed before this entry is considered to be failing Tracked IP Routes If configured dis...

Page 1318: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1318 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Avai...

Page 1319: ...router is in the initial state Backup The VRRP router is a backup router Master The VRRP router is the master router Priority The priority value of the VRRP VLAN Advertisement Interval Indicates the c...

Page 1320: ...d State INIT Priority 1 backup Advertisement Interval 1 sec Preempt Yes Authentication None Virtual IP Addresses Tracked Pings Tracked IP Routes Tracked VLANs indicates a tracking condition has failed...

Page 1321: ...ferent VLANs The Extreme Networks switch maintains an IP routing table for network routes and host routes The table is populated from the following sources Dynamically by way of routing protocol packe...

Page 1322: ...forward Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or BOOTP requests coming from clients on subnets being serviced by the switch and going to hosts on different subnets This feature can be used in vario...

Page 1323: ...ent virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines Permanent IP ARP entries are not affected This command is specific to a single virtual router and it applies to the current virtual router if you do...

Page 1324: ...Protocol DHCP or BOOTP requests coming from clients on subnets being serviced by the switch and going to hosts on different subnets To configure the relay function follow these steps 1 Configure VLAN...

Page 1325: ...nation addresses for forwarding BOOTP packets Syntax Description Default If you do not specify a virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines None Example The following c...

Page 1326: ...variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines In some instances a DHCP server may not properly handle a DHCP request packet containing a relay agent option Use this command to prevent DHCP reply packets...

Page 1327: ...ng serviced by the switch and going to hosts on different subnets To configure the relay function follow these steps 1 Configure VLANs and IP unicast routing 2 Enable the DHCP or BOOTP relay function...

Page 1328: ...tremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1328 Platform Availability This command is avai...

Page 1329: ...eplace Usage Guidelines Use this command to set a policy for the relay agent Packets can be dropped the option 82 information can be replaced the default or the packet can be forwarded with the inform...

Page 1330: ...not specify a virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines Add a permanent IP ARP entry to the system The ip_address is used to match the IP interface address to locate...

Page 1331: ...o the same subnet of the receiving router interface After IP ARP is configured the system responds to ARP Requests on behalf of the device as long as the following conditions are satisfied The valid I...

Page 1332: ...Command Reference Guide 1332 Example The following command configures the switch to answer ARP Requests for all devices with the address range of 100 101 45 1 to 100 101 45 255 configure iparp add pr...

Page 1333: ...fault If you do not specify a virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines Removes any IP ARP entry dynamic or permanent from the table The ip_address is used to match th...

Page 1334: ...ual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines When the mask is not specified the software will assume a host address that is a 32 bit mask Example The following command delete...

Page 1335: ...s the maximum allowed IP ARP entries Syntax Description Default 4096 Usage Guidelines Range 1 20480 The maximum IP ARP entries include dynamic static and incomplete IP ARP entries Example The followin...

Page 1336: ...ng_entries Description Configures the maximum allowed incomplete IP ARP entries Syntax Description Default 256 Usage Guidelines Range 1 4096 Example The following command sets the maximum pending IP A...

Page 1337: ...max_proxy_entries Description Configures the maximum allowed IP ARP proxy entries Syntax Description Default 256 Usage Guidelines Range 0 4096 Example The following command sets the maximum IP ARP pr...

Page 1338: ...ARP entry it begins the timeout for that entry When the timer reaches 0 the entry will be aged out unless IP ARP refresh is enabled If ARP refresh is enabled the switch will ARP for the address befor...

Page 1339: ...nes Use a value of 255 255 255 255 for mask to indicate a host entry Example The following command adds a static address to the routing table configure iproute add 10 1 1 0 24 123 45 67 1 5 History Th...

Page 1340: ...fied destination IP subnet to be discarded Blackhole entries are useful as a security measure or in special circumstances where a specific destination IP subnet must be discarded Blackhole entries are...

Page 1341: ...ackhole route is for discarding traffic destined to a specified IP destination a default blackhole route is for discarding traffic to the unknown IP destination Using this command all traffic with an...

Page 1342: ...outes are used when the router has no other dynamic or static route to the requested destination A default gateway must be located on a configured IP interface Use the unicast only or multicast only o...

Page 1343: ...al router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines Use a value of 255 255 255 255 or 32 for mask to indicate a host entry Example The following command deletes an address from the g...

Page 1344: ...Description Default If you do not specify a virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines None Example The following command removes a blackhole address from the routing t...

Page 1345: ...rname Description Deletes a default blackhole route from the routing table Syntax Description Default If you do not specify a virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines...

Page 1346: ...virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines Default routes are used when the router has no other dynamic or static route to the requested destination A default gateway...

Page 1347: ...ng upon the learned source of the route rip Specifies RIP bootp Specifies BOOTP ebgp Specifies E BGP routes ibgp Specifies I BGP routes icmp Specifies ICMP blackhole Specifies the blackhole route stat...

Page 1348: ...e configuration and reboot the system NOTE The priority for a blackhole route can not overlap with the priority of any other route origin Example The following command sets IP route priority for stati...

Page 1349: ...ckDiamond 12804 switches only 8 not configurable Usage Guidelines You must save the configuration and reboot the switch for the new value to take effect To see the current and configured value use the...

Page 1350: ...t the intervals specified identifying itself as a default router IRDP enabled client machines will use this information to determine which gateway address to use for routing data packets to other netw...

Page 1351: ...tub IP networks Once you have added a secondary IP address to a VLAN you cannot unconfigure the primary IP address of that VLAN until you delete all the secondary addresses Delete secondary address wi...

Page 1352: ...support multinetting Once you have added a secondary IP address to a VLAN you cannot unconfigure the primary IP address of that VLAN until you delete all the secondary addresses Use the all keyword t...

Page 1353: ...butes will be ignored Match attributes Destination UDP Port Number destination port Source IP address source ipaddress Action modified set attributes Destination IP address destination ipaddress VLAN...

Page 1354: ...UDP forwarding module will process those entries even if the entries do not contain any attributes for UDP forwarding Having more than eight entries will drastically reduce the performance of the sys...

Page 1355: ...ssing of BOOTP packets on a VLAN to obtain an IP address for the VLAN from a BOOTP server Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables the generatio...

Page 1356: ...ed Usage Guidelines This command can disable the BOOTP relay functionality for a particular virtual router or all of them If you use the command without specifying a virtual router the functionality i...

Page 1357: ...ICMP address mask request is received The default setting is disabled If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the generation of certain ICMP packe...

Page 1358: ...lem message type 12 when the switch cannot properly process the IP header or IP option information If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the gen...

Page 1359: ...e 3 code 3 when a TCP or UDP request is made to the switch and no application is waiting for the request or access policy denies the request If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP in...

Page 1360: ...scription Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Disables the generation of ICMP redirects Type 5 to hosts who direct routed traffic to the switch where the switch detects that there is another router in th...

Page 1361: ...e 11 when the TTL field expires during forwarding IP multicast packets do not trigger ICMP time exceeded messages If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only...

Page 1362: ...timestamp response type 14 code 0 when an ICMP timestamp request is received If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the generation of certain ICM...

Page 1363: ...tion of an ICMP timestamp response type 3 code 0 when an ICMP timestamp request is received If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the generation...

Page 1364: ...routing mode If the switch has a route to a destination network the switch will use that router as the gateway to forward the packets to If that router knows about a better route to the destination an...

Page 1365: ...address is within the range of the local interface or VLAN domain Syntax Description Default Enabled Usage Guidelines If you do not specify a virtual router the command applies to the current virtual...

Page 1366: ...Default Enabled Usage Guidelines The purpose of disabling ARP refresh is to reduce ARP traffic in a high node count layer 2 switching only environment If you do not specify a virtual router the comma...

Page 1367: ...st forwarding Broadcast forwarding can be disabled without disabling IP forwarding When new IP interfaces are added IP forwarding and IP broadcast forwarding is disabled by default Other IP related co...

Page 1368: ...t header Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Disables the switch from forwarding IP packets with the IP option for loose source routing turne...

Page 1369: ...in the IPv4 packet header Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Disables the switch from adding itself into the IP options header when the rec...

Page 1370: ...option in the IPv4 packet header Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Disables the switch from adding a timestamp into the IP options header w...

Page 1371: ...packet header Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Disables the switch from forwarding IP packets that have the strict source routing IP opti...

Page 1372: ...router alert Description Disables processing of the router alert IP option in IPv4 packet headers Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines None E...

Page 1373: ...ration of ICMP router advertisement messages on one or all VLANs Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If no optional argument is specified all the IP interfaces are affected Example Th...

Page 1374: ...tion Disables UDP echo server support Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines UDP Echo packets are used to measure the transit time for data between the transmitting and receiving end Exa...

Page 1375: ...sing of BOOTP packets on a VLAN to obtain an IP address for the VLAN from a BOOTP server Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command enables the generation...

Page 1376: ...tch and going to hosts on different subnets This feature can be used in various applications including DHCP services between Windows NT servers and clients running Windows 95 To configure the relay fu...

Page 1377: ...ICMP address mask request is received The default setting is disabled If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the generation of certain ICMP packe...

Page 1378: ...em message type 12 when the switch cannot properly process the IP header or IP option information If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the gene...

Page 1379: ...3 code 3 when a TCP or UDP request is made to the switch and no application is waiting for the request or access policy denies the request If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP inte...

Page 1380: ...subnets If a host sends a packet to it s default gateway the gateway router will look at it s route table to find the best route to the destination If it sees that the best route is through a router...

Page 1381: ...11 when the TTL field expires during forwarding IP multicast packets do not trigger ICMP time exceeded messages If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only af...

Page 1382: ...imestamp response type 14 code 0 when an ICMP timestamp request is received If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the generation of certain ICMP...

Page 1383: ...ion of an ICMP timestamp response type 3 code 0 when an ICMP timestamp request is received If a VLAN is not specified the command applies to all IP interfaces This command only affects the generation...

Page 1384: ...switch will use that router as the gateway to forward the packets to If that router knows about a better route to the destination and the next hop is in the same subnet as the originating router the s...

Page 1385: ...address is within the range of the local interface or VLAN domain Syntax Description Default Enabled Usage Guidelines If you do not specify a virtual router the command applies to the current virtual...

Page 1386: ...If ARP refresh is enabled the switch will re ARP for the host at 3 4th of the configured ARP timer For example If the ARP timeout is set to 20 minutes the switch will attempt to re ARP for the host w...

Page 1387: ...rwarding can be enabled When new IP interfaces are added IP forwarding and IP broadcast forwarding is disabled by default Other IP related configuration is not affected Example The following command e...

Page 1388: ...tremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1388 Platform Availability This command is avai...

Page 1389: ...e IP option 0x83 enabled Source routing is used when a sending host specifies the router interfaces that the packet must traverse on it s way to it s destination When loose source routing is used it m...

Page 1390: ...ents or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines IP option record route IP option 7 means that each router along the path should add it s IP address into the options data Enabling means that the swi...

Page 1391: ...ription This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Enables the switch to use the timestamp IP option 0x44 When the switch receives an IP packet with the timestamp opti...

Page 1392: ...used when a sending host specifies the router interfaces that the packet must traverse on it s way to it s destination When strict source routing is used it means that the packet must use the exact pa...

Page 1393: ...ption router alert Description Enables processing of the router alert IP option in IPv4 packet headers Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines No...

Page 1394: ...route sharing can be used with static routes or with OSPF routes In OSPF this capability is referred to as equal cost multipath ECMP routing Configure static routes and or OSPF as you would normally...

Page 1395: ...determine what default gateway address to use The switch will send out IP packets at the intervals specified identifying itself as a default router IRDP enabled client machines will use this informat...

Page 1396: ...bles UDP echo server support Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines UDP Echo packets are used to measure the transit time for data between the transmitting and receiving end Example The...

Page 1397: ...n Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command performs a look up in the route table to determine the best way to reach the specified IP address rtlookup 10 34 25 1 History This com...

Page 1398: ...isplays the DHCP BOOTP relay statistics and configuration for the virtual routers Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default None Usage Guidelines None Example The following...

Page 1399: ...ow output displays the following information ip_addr Specifies an IP address mac Specifies a MAC address vlan_name Specifies a VLAN name permanent Specifies permanent entries vr_name Specifies a virtu...

Page 1400: ...26 00 50 04 ad 36 5e 6 NO Default 4095 VR Default 10 128 32 30 00 b0 d0 23 f2 9a 11 NO Default 4095 VR Default 10 128 32 54 00 b0 d0 59 e4 e2 6 NO Default 4095 VR Default 10 128 32 55 00 a0 c9 0c 41 d...

Page 1401: ...Default 4095 VR Default 10 128 32 116 00 04 96 1f a4 0e 0 NO Default 4095 Dynamic Entries 1 Static Entries 0 Pending Entries 0 In Request 111 In Response 3 Out Request 110 Out Response 111 Failed Req...

Page 1402: ...s specified then all proxy ARP entries are displayed If you do not specify a virtual router the command applies to the current virtual router Example The following command displays the proxy ARP table...

Page 1403: ...N s information will be displayed Global IP configuration information includes IP address netmask etc IP forwarding information IP multicast forwarding information VLAN name and VLANID ICMP configurat...

Page 1404: ...d in the display by an If there are multiple routes to the same destination network the will indicate which route is the most preferable route If you do not specify a virtual router the command applie...

Page 1405: ...ing policies configured for the origin of the route is applied to the route After matching on specified characteristics the characteristics for the route can be modified using the policy The character...

Page 1406: ...r of unicast IP packets processed by the CPU InBcast Total number of broadcast IP packets processed by the CPU InMcast Total number of multicast IP packets processed by the CPU InHdrEr Total number of...

Page 1407: ...n invalid CODE value InTooshort Incoming ICMP packets that are too short Bad chksum Incoming ICMP packets with checksum errors In Badlen Incoming ICMP packets with length errors echo reply In Out ICMP...

Page 1408: ...finition Packets IN OUT Total number of IP packets received or transmitted on a VLAN router interface Octets IN OUT Total number of octets received or transmitted on a VLAN router interface Mcast pack...

Page 1409: ...olicy manager command show policy policy name detail However the format of the policy display will be different than this command Example The following command displays all the configured UDP forwardi...

Page 1410: ...Default Disabled Usage Guidelines In some instances a DHCP server may not properly handle a DHCP request packet containing a relay agent option Use this command to disable the switch from preventing...

Page 1411: ...e Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP relay agent option option 82 Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines To enable the DHCP relay agent o...

Page 1412: ...res the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP relay agent option option 82 policy Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Replace Usage Guidelines Use this command to...

Page 1413: ...nconfigure icmp Description Resets all ICMP settings to the default values Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command...

Page 1414: ...the following to their default values IP ARP timeout max ARP entries max ARP pending entries ARP checking ARP refresh Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Gu...

Page 1415: ...Description Resets all router advertisement settings to the default values Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command...

Page 1416: ...Description Removes any UDP forwarding profile from a VLAN Syntax Description Default No UDP profiles are associated with the VLAN Usage Guidelines None Example The following command removes any UDP...

Page 1417: ...termines the best path for each of its routes Beginning in release 11 2 ExtremeWare XOS can provide both IPv4 and IPv6 routing at the same time Separate routing tables are maintained for the two versi...

Page 1418: ...e neighbor cache The vr option is used to specify the virtual router on which the operation is performed When this option is omitted it applies to VR Default When the ipv6address or vlan options are s...

Page 1419: ...ric of 1 is used Usage Guidelines Use a prefix length of 128 to indicate a host entry Example The following command adds a static route to the routing table configure iproute add 2001 db8 0 1111 64 fe...

Page 1420: ...where a specific destination address must be discarded Blackhole entries are treated like permanent entries in the event of a switch reset or power off on cycle Blackhole entries are never aged out o...

Page 1421: ...a specified IP destination a default blackhole route is for discarding traffic to the unknown IP destination Using this command all traffic with an unknown destination is discarded The default blackh...

Page 1422: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1422 Platform Availability This command is ava...

Page 1423: ...dynamic or static route to the requested destination A default gateway must be located on a configured IP interface Use the unicast only or multicast only options to specify a particular traffic type...

Page 1424: ...ric of 1 is used Usage Guidelines Use a prefix length of 128 to indicate a host entry Example The following command deletes a static address from the routing table configure iproute delete 2001 db8 0...

Page 1425: ...ere a specific destination address must be discarded Blackhole entries are treated like permanent entries in the event of a switch reset or power off on cycle Blackhole entries are never aged out of t...

Page 1426: ...stination a default blackhole route is for discarding traffic to the unknown IP destination Using this command all traffic with an unknown destination is discarded The default blackhole route is treat...

Page 1427: ...other dynamic or static route to the requested destination A default gateway must be located on a configured IP interface Use the unicast only or multicast only options to specify a particular traffi...

Page 1428: ...ities assigned to routes depending upon the learned source of the route ripng Specifies RIPng icmp Specifies ICMP blackhole Specifies the blackhole route static Specifies static routes ospfv3 intra Sp...

Page 1429: ...expertly familiar with the possible consequences If you change the route priority you must save the configuration and reboot the system NOTE The priority for a blackhole route can not overlap with th...

Page 1430: ...lt If you do not specify a virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines This command adds static entries to the neighbor cache Example The following command adds a static...

Page 1431: ...cache Syntax Description Default If you do not specify a virtual router the current virtual router context is used Usage Guidelines This command deletes static entries from the neighbor cache Example...

Page 1432: ...this command are only included in the router advertisement messages and have no operational impact on VLANs To configure the parameters for this prefix use the following command configure vlan vlan_na...

Page 1433: ...uter discovery advertisements on the VLAN Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command deletes previously defined router advertisement prefixes Example The following command deletes th...

Page 1434: ...nd is either 0 or between max interval and 9000 seconds A value of 0 indicates that the router is not to be used as a default router After a host sends a router solicitation and receives a valid route...

Page 1435: ...sage Guidelines Configures the current hop limit value to be included in the router advertisement messages Hosts then use the current hop limit when they send packets A value of 0 means unspecified by...

Page 1436: ...nd configures the link MTU placed into the router advertisement messages Advertisement of the MTU helps ensure use of a consistent MTU by hosts on the VLAN The minimum value is 0 The maximum value is...

Page 1437: ...onfiguration flag in the router advertisement messages A value of on tells hosts to use the administered stateful protocol DHCP for address autoconfiguration in addition to any addresses autoconfigure...

Page 1438: ...n Default 600 seconds Usage Guidelines This command configures the maximum amount of time before an unsolicited router advertisement message is advertised over the links corresponding to the VLAN Exam...

Page 1439: ...d router advertisement message is advertised over the links corresponding to the VLAN The minimum value is 3 seconds The maximum time is 75 max interval seconds If you do not explicitly set this value...

Page 1440: ...mmand configures the contents of the other stateful configuration flag in the router advertisement messages When set to on hosts use the administered stateful protocol DHCP for autoconfiguration of ot...

Page 1441: ...e reachable time is the time in milliseconds that a node assumes a neighbor is reachable after having received a reachability confirmation A value of 0 means the time is unspecified by this router The...

Page 1442: ...n the router advertisement messages The retransmit time in milliseconds is the time between retransmitted neighbor solicitation messages A value of 0 means the value is unspecified by this router The...

Page 1443: ...or not off The onlink flag option modifies the on link flag of the prefix The on link flag specifies whether the prefix can be used for on link determination on or not off The default value of the on...

Page 1444: ...ommand Reference Guide 1444 Example The following command sets the on link parameter of the prefix 3aaa 3161 64 to off for the VLAN top_floor configure vlan top_floor router discovery set prefix 3aaa...

Page 1445: ...4 source address of the endpoint in hexadecimal colon separated form For example for a tunnel endpoint located at IPv4 address 10 20 30 40 the tunnel address would be 2002 a14 1e28 16 In hex 10 is a 2...

Page 1446: ...any particular virtual router The tunnel name must be unique and cannot overlap the same name space as VLANs other tunnels or virtual routers The source address of the tunnel must be one of the IPv4 a...

Page 1447: ...unnel can be configured on the system The tunnel name must be unique and cannot overlap the same name space as VLANs other tunnels or virtual routers The source address of the tunnel must be one of th...

Page 1448: ...sage Guidelines This command will destroy a previously created tunnel The command acts on either a 6to4 or a 6in4 tunnel Because the interface will be removed all routes pointing out that interface wi...

Page 1449: ...terfaces on the current virtual router Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines When new IPv6 interfaces are added IP forwarding is disabled by default Other IP related configuration is no...

Page 1450: ...rtisements on the VLAN and the processing of router discovery messages Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines If no VLAN is specified Router Discovery is disabled on all IPv6 configured VLANs...

Page 1451: ...IPv6 address on the current virtual router Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines When new IPv6 interfaces are added IP forwarding is disabled by default Other IP related configuration i...

Page 1452: ...lines This command is only valid when the specified VLAN has an IPv6 address associated with it After IPv6 Router Discovery is enabled on a VLAN router advertisement messages are regularly sent on all...

Page 1453: ...N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command performs a look up in the route table to determine the best way to reach the specified IP address rtlookup 3aaa 5643 ef80 2525 1023 5213 History...

Page 1454: ...is specified then global IP configuration is displayed Otherwise specific interface s will be displayed Global IP configuration information includes IP address netmask etc IP forwarding information IP...

Page 1455: ...it is preceded in the display by an If there are multiple routes to the same destination network the will indicate which route is the most preferable route If you do not specify a virtual router the...

Page 1456: ...us sources the routing policies configured for the origin of the route is applied to the route After matching on specified characteristics the characteristics for the route can be modified using the p...

Page 1457: ...Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command only shows statistics of the CPU handled packets Not all packets are handled by the CPU If you do not specify a virtual router the command...

Page 1458: ...ess or by VLAN The permanent keyword filters the output to display static entries The vr_name indicates the virtual router on which the operation is performed In its absence the operation applies to V...

Page 1459: ...ts only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1459 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Pl...

Page 1460: ...ple The following command displays router discovery settings for the VLAN top_floor show router discovery vlan top_floor The following is sample output Router Advertisements disabled on v1 Minimum Max...

Page 1461: ...ommand has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines This command displays system tunnel information Example The following command displays system tunnel information show tunnel The follo...

Page 1462: ...from a tunnel Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command will unconfigure an IPv6 address prefix route from the specified tunnel Example The following command unconfigures the 6in4...

Page 1463: ...ntry contains the following information IP address of the destination network Metric hop count to the destination network IP address of the next router Timer that tracks the amount of time since the e...

Page 1464: ...ounters clear rip counters Description Clears the RIP counters statistics Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command...

Page 1465: ...Description Default N A Usage Guidelines When an IP interface is created RIP configuration is disabled on the interface by default When the RIP interface is disabled the parameters are not reset to de...

Page 1466: ...efault N A Usage Guidelines When an IP interface is created RIP configuration is disabled on the interface by default When the RIP interface is disabled by this command the parameters are not reset to...

Page 1467: ...gure rip garbagetime seconds Description Configures the RIP garbage time Syntax Description Default 120 seconds Usage Guidelines None Example The following command configures the RIP garbage time to h...

Page 1468: ...ded to the system routing table Syntax Description Default No policy Usage Guidelines Use this command to associate a policy with the RIP routes installed into the system table Use the none option to...

Page 1469: ...Default 180 seconds Usage Guidelines If a router does not receive an update message from its neighbor within the route timeout period 180 seconds by default the router assumes the connection between...

Page 1470: ...lowing command configures the receive mode for the VLAN finance to accept only RIP version 1 format packets configure rip finance rxmode v1only History This command was first available in ExtremeWare...

Page 1471: ...ode for the VLAN finance to transmit version 2 format packets to the broadcast address configure rip finance txmode v1comp History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Ava...

Page 1472: ...ge Guidelines The router exchanges an update message with each neighbor every 30 seconds default value or if there is a change to the overall routed topology also called triggered updates The timer gr...

Page 1473: ...ce Syntax Description Default The default setting is 1 Usage Guidelines The specified interface cost is added to the cost of the route received through this interface Example The following command con...

Page 1474: ...valid routes This policy can be combined with the trusted neighbor policy to accept selected routes only from a set of trusted neighbors Use the out option to configure an output route policy which d...

Page 1475: ...icy ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1475 Platform Availability This command i...

Page 1476: ...is command to set a policy to determine trusted neighbors A neighbor is defined by its IP address Only the RIP control packets from trusted neighbors will be processed Example The following command co...

Page 1477: ...limitations that can cause problems in large networks including A limit of 15 hops between the source and destination networks A large amount of bandwidth taken up by periodic broadcasts of the entir...

Page 1478: ...The disable RIP aggregation command disables the RIP aggregation of subnet information on a switch configured to send RIPv2 compatible traffic The switch summarizes subnet routes to the nearest class...

Page 1479: ...tes into the RIP domain Example The following command disables RIP from redistributing any routes learned from OSPF disable rip export ospf History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS...

Page 1480: ...ription Disables the advertisement of a default route Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command unconfigures a...

Page 1481: ...les Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Like split horizon poison reverse is a scheme for eliminating the possibility of loops in the routed topology In this case a router advertises a route over the sam...

Page 1482: ...as no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Split horizon is a scheme for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was learned...

Page 1483: ...eir metric Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Triggered updates occur whenever a router changes the metric for a route and it is required to...

Page 1484: ...router alert Description Disables router alert IP option in outgoing RIP control packets Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example T...

Page 1485: ...limitations that can cause problems in large networks including A limit of 15 hops between the source and destination networks A large amount of bandwidth taken up by periodic broadcasts of the entire...

Page 1486: ...n interface configured to send RIPv1 or RIPv2 compatible traffic The switch summarizes subnet routes to the nearest class network route The following rules apply when using RIP aggregation Subnet rout...

Page 1487: ...injected into RIP If the cost metric is set to 0 the cost is inserted from the route For example with BGP the cost could be the MED or the length of the BGP path The tag value is used only by special...

Page 1488: ...series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1488 Example The following command enables RIP to redistribute routes from all OSPF routes enable rip export ospf cost 0 History This command...

Page 1489: ...lt route only if a reachable default route is in the system route table The default route advertisement is filtered using the out policy The cost metric is inserted for all RIP learned static and dire...

Page 1490: ...ault Enabled Usage Guidelines Like split horizon poison reverse is a scheme for eliminating the possibility of loops in the routed topology In this case a router advertises a route over the same inter...

Page 1491: ...and has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Split horizon is a scheme for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was lea...

Page 1492: ...ric Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Triggered updates occur whenever a router changes the metric for a route and it is required to send a...

Page 1493: ...use ip router alert Description Enables the router alert IP option in the outgoing RIP control packets Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines N...

Page 1494: ...94 show rip show rip Description Displays RIP specific configuration Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displ...

Page 1495: ...iption Default Show summary output for all interfaces Usage Guidelines Summary includes the following information per interface VLAN name IP address and mask interface status packets transmitted packe...

Page 1496: ...smitted sent triggered updates packets received bad packets received bad routes received Example The following command displays the RIP configuration for all VLANS show rip interface The following com...

Page 1497: ...an vlan name Description Displays RIP specific statistics and configuration for a VLAN in detail Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays RIP specifi...

Page 1498: ...ype Description Displays RIP specific memory usage Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays RIP specific memory for all types show rip memory detail...

Page 1499: ...layed include all routes advertised by RIP including routes exported from the system routing table and originated by other protocols for example BGP Example The following command displays a summary of...

Page 1500: ...rameters to the default for all VLANs or for the specified VLAN Syntax Description Default All Usage Guidelines Does not change the enable disable state of the RIP settings Example The following comma...

Page 1501: ...nformation IP address and prefix length of the destination network Metric hop count to the destination network IP address of the next hop router if the destination is not directly connected Interface...

Page 1502: ...unnel name Description Clears the RIPng global or interface specific counters statistics Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command clears the RIPng statistics...

Page 1503: ...nes For RIPng to be active on the interface it must also be globally enabled using the command enable ripng If the keyword all is specified all IPv6 configured VLANs or tunnels will be configured for...

Page 1504: ...ng specific interface configuration will be preserved even if RIPng is unconfigured on the interface The interface configuration information is removed only when the IPv6 interface itself gets deleted...

Page 1505: ...lt 120 seconds Usage Guidelines This command configures the time interval after which a route in the RIPng routing database that has expired will be removed The value is rounded off to nearest multipl...

Page 1506: ...nstalled into the system routing table from the RIPng routing process This policy can be used to modify parameters associated with routes installed into the routing table Use the none option to remove...

Page 1507: ...cy ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1507 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 1508: ...router does not receive an update message from its neighbor within the route timeout period 180 seconds by default the router assumes the connection between it and its neighbor is no longer available...

Page 1509: ...onds Usage Guidelines The router exchanges an update message with each neighbor every 30 seconds default value or if there is a change to the overall routed topology also called triggered updates The...

Page 1510: ...on Default The default setting is 1 Usage Guidelines The specified interface cost is added to the cost of the route received through this interface Example The following command configures the cost fo...

Page 1511: ...input route policy which determines which RIPng routes are accepted as valid routes from RIPng neighbors This policy can be combined with the trusted neighbor policy to accept selected routes only fr...

Page 1512: ...ckbone to accept routes from its neighbor as specified by the policy nosales configure ripng vlan backbone route policy in nosales The following command uses the policy nosales to determine which RIP...

Page 1513: ...determine trusted neighbors A neighbor is defined by its IP address Only the RIPng control packets from trusted neighbors will be processed The following policy designates neighbors from the fe80 202...

Page 1514: ...e Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1514 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Platform Ava...

Page 1515: ...e ripng disable ripng Description Disables RIPng for the whole router Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command...

Page 1516: ...m the switch routing table into the RIPng domain Example The following command disables RIPng from redistributing any routes learned from OSPFv3 disable ripng export ospfv3 History This command was fi...

Page 1517: ...cription Disables the advertisement of a default route to the neighbors Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following comma...

Page 1518: ...poison reverse is a scheme for eliminating the possibility of loops in the routed topology In this case a router advertises a route over the same interface that supplied the route but the route uses a...

Page 1519: ...d Usage Guidelines Split horizon is a scheme for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was learned Split horizon omits routes learned from a n...

Page 1520: ...it is required to send an update message immediately even if it is not yet time for a regular update message to be sent This will generally result in faster convergence but may also result in more RIP...

Page 1521: ...tions that can cause problems in large networks including A limit of 15 hops between the source and destination networks A large amount of bandwidth taken up by periodic broadcasts of the entire routi...

Page 1522: ...e which types of OSPFv3 routes are injected or you can simply choose ospfv3 which will inject all learned OSPFv3 routes regardless of type The cost metric is inserted for all RIPng learned static and...

Page 1523: ...modifies the cost of redistributed routes from OSPFv3 and statically configured routes entry filter_rt If match any Route origin ospfv3 Route origin static then cost 10 Example The following command e...

Page 1524: ...s learned from other neighbors The default route advertisement is filtered using the out policy Use the command configure ripng route policy to specify the out policy The cost metric is inserted for a...

Page 1525: ...router advertises a route over the same interface that supplied the route but the route uses a hop count of 16 defining it as unreachable If both split horizon and poison reverse are enabled poison r...

Page 1526: ...horizon is a scheme for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was learned Split horizon omits routes learned from a neighbor in updates sent...

Page 1527: ...tion Default Enabled Usage Guidelines Triggered updates occur whenever a router changes the metric for a route and it is required to send an update message immediately even if it is not yet time for a...

Page 1528: ...ommand displays RIPng global configuration and runtime information show ripng The following is sample output from this command Ripng Routing Enabled Triggered Updates Enabled Aggregation Disabled Upda...

Page 1529: ...Ware XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1529 Platform Availability This command is available...

Page 1530: ...ed only the data for that interface is displayed in detail If the keyword detail is specified detailed data for all interfaces is displayed Example The following command displays the RIPng configurati...

Page 1531: ...mand VLAN v1 Interface 22cc 3 64 Router RIPng Enabled Cost 15 Input Policy None Output Policy None Trusted GW Policy gw6 Poison Reverse Enabled Split Horizon Enabled Triggered Updates Enabled Rcved Pa...

Page 1532: ...ibuted routes Example The following command displays a summary of RIPng specific routes show ripng routes The following is sample output from this command Network Next Hop Mtr VLAN 2aaa 64 fe80 201 30...

Page 1533: ...uting table entry for 2bbb 64 Paths 2 available best 1 fe80 201 30ff fef4 5ca0 v1 from fe80 201 30ff fef4 5ca0 v1 v1 Metric 2 tag 0 timeout in 02 38 valid best fe80 201 30ff fe94 f400 v2 from fe80 201...

Page 1534: ...uidelines Issuing the command unconfigure ripng resets all the interfaces and the global configuration to the defaults and disables RIPng as that is the default Example The following command resets th...

Page 1535: ...tate advertisement LSA traffic and reduces the computations needed to maintain the LSDB Routing within the area is determined only by the topology of the area The three types of routers defined by OSP...

Page 1536: ...OSPF Edge Mode OSPF Edge Mode is a subset of OSPF available on platforms with an Advanced Edge license There are two restrictions on OSPF Edge Mode At most two Active OSPF VLAN interfaces are permitt...

Page 1537: ...F counters statistics Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines The global command clear counters also clears all OSPF counters This global command is the equivalent of clear ospf counters for O...

Page 1538: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1538 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1539: ...ea Syntax Description Default The default cost is automatic Usage Guidelines The range is 1 through 65535 Example The following command configures the cost metric of the VLAN accounting configure ospf...

Page 1540: ...ault The default setting is 1 Usage Guidelines The range is 0 through 255 and the default setting is 1 Setting the value to 0 ensures that the router is never selected as the designated router or back...

Page 1541: ...information is applied to all OSPF interfaces within the area The encrypted option is used by the switch when generating a configuration file and when parsing a switch generated configuration file Do...

Page 1542: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1542 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1543: ...ckbone A virtual link must be established between two ABRs that have a common area with one ABR connected to the backbone Specify the following router identifier Far end router interface number area i...

Page 1544: ...r interfaces Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command enables OSPF on a VLAN named accounting configure ospf add vlan accounting area 0 0 0 1 History Thi...

Page 1545: ...rmation on the interface Example The following command configures the OSPF link type as automatic on a VLAN named accounting configure ospf add vlan accounting area 0 0 0 1 link type auto History This...

Page 1546: ...areas an ABR function a policy can be applied to an OSPF area that filters a set of OSPF external routes from being advertised into that area Using the none mode specifies that no external filter is...

Page 1547: ...ge Guidelines For switches configured to support multiple OSPF areas an ABR function a policy can be applied to an OSPF area that filters a set of OSPF inter area routes from being sourced from any ot...

Page 1548: ...BR Example The following command is used to summarize a certain range of IP addresses within an area and export them out as a single address configure ospf area 1 2 3 4 add range 10 1 2 0 24 advertise...

Page 1549: ...ion Deletes a range of aggregated IP addresses in an OSPF area Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes an aggregated IP address range configure ospf...

Page 1550: ...ax Description Default Normal Usage Guidelines A normal area is an area that is not any of the following Stub area NSSA Virtual links can be configured through normal areas External routes can be dist...

Page 1551: ...e backbone area if translated to type 5 LSAs When configuring an OSPF area as an NSSA the translate option should only be used on NSSA border routers where translation is to be enforced If translate i...

Page 1552: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1552 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1553: ...rea The area that connects to a stub area can be the backbone area External route information is not distributed into stub areas Stub areas are used to reduce memory and computation requirements on OS...

Page 1554: ...cify the following retransmit interval If you set an interval that is too short unnecessary retransmissions will result transit delay The transit delay must be greater than 0 hello interval Smaller ti...

Page 1555: ...rval Under some circumstances setting the wait interval to smaller values can help OSPF routers on a broadcast network to synchronize more quickly at the expense of possibly electing an incorrect DR o...

Page 1556: ...ult for timeout is 0 which indicates that once the router goes into overflow state it stays there until OSPF is disabled and then re enabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command configu...

Page 1557: ...d address range Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command is only valid on an ASBR Example The following command summarizes AS external routes configure ospf ase summary add 175 1 0...

Page 1558: ...Deletes an aggregated OSPF external route Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command is only valid on an ASBR Example The following command deletes the aggregated AS external route...

Page 1559: ...outer identifier area identifier Description Removes a virtual link Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes a virtual link configure ospf delete virt...

Page 1560: ...vlan vlan name all Description Disables OSPF on one or all VLANs router interfaces Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables OSPF on VLAN accounting c...

Page 1561: ...outes added to the system routing table Syntax Description Default No policy Usage Guidelines Use this command to associate a policy with the OSPF routes installed into the system table Use the none o...

Page 1562: ...efault The default setting is 30 seconds Usage Guidelines The range is between 0 disabled and 600 seconds using multiples of 5 seconds The LSAs added to the LSDB during the interval are batched togeth...

Page 1563: ...bps interfaces and optionally the 10 Gbps interface Syntax Description Default 10 Mbps The default cost is 10 100 Mbps The default cost is 5 1 Gbps The default cost is 4 10 Gbps The default cost is 2...

Page 1564: ...nfigured for unplanned restarts it will advertise Grace LSAs after restarting but before sending any Hellos When configured for both the router will advertise restarting regardless of whether the rest...

Page 1565: ...nds Usage Guidelines This command configures the grace period sent out to helper neighbor routers and used by the restarting router The value of the grace period must be greater that the dead interval...

Page 1566: ...SPF interface may not enter helper mode when the router is performing a graceful restart All the interfaces to a neighbor router must be configured as graceful restart helpers or the router will not s...

Page 1567: ...er ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1567 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 1568: ...ve a unique router ID It is recommended that you manually set the router ID of the switches participating in OSPF instead of having the switch automatically choose its router ID based on the highest i...

Page 1569: ...he minimum number of seconds between Shortest Path First SPF recalculations Syntax Description Default 3 seconds Usage Guidelines None Example The following command configures the minimum number of se...

Page 1570: ...the timers and authentication for the new VLANs explicitly Example The following command sets the timers on the virtual link in area 0 0 0 2 and remote router ID 6 6 6 6 configure ospf virtual link 6...

Page 1571: ...imer ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1571 Platform Availability This command...

Page 1572: ...to the backbone When designing networks you should start with area 0 and then expand into other areas The backbone allows summary information to be exchanged between ABRs Every ABR hears the area summ...

Page 1573: ...d ip address Description Configures the IP address of a point to point neighbor Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command configures the IP address of a point...

Page 1574: ...address Description Deletes the IP address of a point to point neighbor Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes the IP address of a point to point ne...

Page 1575: ...terval This interval is required by the OSPF standard to be equal to the router dead interval Under some circumstances setting the wait interval to smaller values can help OSPF routers on a broadcast...

Page 1576: ...ch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1576 Example The following command configures the OSPF wait interval on the VLAN accounting configure ospf vlan accounting timer 10 15 20 60 60 History...

Page 1577: ...rea identifier Description Creates an OSPF area Syntax Description Default Area 0 0 0 0 Usage Guidelines Area 0 0 0 0 does not need to be created It exists by default Example The following command cre...

Page 1578: ...an OSPF area or all OSPF areas Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines An OSPF area cannot be deleted if it has an associated interface Also area 0 0 0 0 cannot be deleted Example The followin...

Page 1579: ...ospf disable ospf Description Disables the OSPF process for the router Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command dis...

Page 1580: ...r network uses opaque LSAs all routers on your OSPF network should support opaque LSAs Routers that do not support opaque LSAs do not store or flood them At minimum a well interconnected subsection of...

Page 1581: ...ault setting is disabled Usage Guidelines Use this command to stop OSPF from exporting routes derived from other protocols Example The following command disables OSPF to export BGP related routes to o...

Page 1582: ...spf originate default Description Disables the generation of a default external LSA Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The followin...

Page 1583: ...efault The default is enabled Usage Guidelines This command disables the restart helper router from terminating graceful OSPF restart when received LSAs would affect the restarting router Example The...

Page 1584: ...outer alert Description Disables the router alert IP option in outgoing OSPF control packets Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Exampl...

Page 1585: ...ospf enable ospf Description Enables the OSPF process for the router Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command enab...

Page 1586: ...network uses opaque LSAs all routers on your OSPF network should support opaque LSAs Routers that do not support opaque LSAs do not store or flood them At minimum a well interconnected subsection of...

Page 1587: ...ute The tag value is used only by special routing applications Use 0 if you do not have specific requirements for using a tag The tag value in this instance has no relationship with 802 1Q VLAN taggin...

Page 1588: ...Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1588 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform Avai...

Page 1589: ...scription Default N A Usage Guidelines If always is specified OSPF always advertises the default route If always is not specified OSPF adds the default LSA if a reachable default route is in the route...

Page 1590: ...PF restart when received LSAs would affect the restarting router This will occur when the restart helper receives an LSA that will be flooded to the restarting router or when there is a changed LSA on...

Page 1591: ...e ospf use ip router alert Description Enables the generation of the OSPF router alert IP option Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Ex...

Page 1592: ...1592 show ospf show ospf Description Displays global OSPF information Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disp...

Page 1593: ...ospf area area identifier Description Displays information about OSPF areas Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays information about OSPF area 1 2...

Page 1594: ...area detail Description Displays information about all OSPF areas Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays information about all OSPF areas show ospf...

Page 1595: ...summary Description Displays the OSPF external route aggregation configuration Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following co...

Page 1596: ...etail Description Displays detailed information about all OSPF interfaces Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays information about all OSPF interfa...

Page 1597: ...n about one or all OSPF interfaces Syntax Description Default If no argument is specified all OSPF interfaces are displayed Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays information abo...

Page 1598: ...allows you to control the displayed entries in large routing tables A common use of this command is to omit all optional parameters resulting in the following shortened form show ospf lsdb The shorte...

Page 1599: ...mond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1599 Example The following command displays all areas and all types in a summary format show ospf lsdb History This command was fir...

Page 1600: ...ype Description Displays OSPF specific memory usage Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays OSPF specific memory for all types show ospf memory deta...

Page 1601: ...Description Default If no argument is specified all OSPF neighbors are displayed Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays information about the OSPF neighbors on the VLAN accountin...

Page 1602: ...cription Default N A Usage Guidelines area identifier Transit area used for connecting the two end points The transit area cannot have an area identifier of 0 0 0 0 and cannot be a stub or NSSA area E...

Page 1603: ...ription Resets one or all OSPF interfaces to the default settings Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command resets the OSPF interface to the default settings o...

Page 1604: ...OSPF Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1604...

Page 1605: ...in an area is hidden from the rest of the autonomous system Hiding this information enables a significant reduction in link state advertisement LSA traffic and reduces the computations needed to maint...

Page 1606: ...s the equivalent of clear ospfv3 counters for OSPFv3 This command can be used to clear various OSPFv3 counters Interface Area Virtual Link System etc The following is the list of various counters that...

Page 1607: ...Area Specific counters All counters of interfaces associated with an area Number of SPF runs Domain global system specific counters Number of self originated LSAs Number of received LSAs Example The...

Page 1608: ...nt instance ID An interface associated with two OSPFv3 domains cannot have same instance ID To change the instance ID associated with an interface you must first remove the interface from the OSPFv3 a...

Page 1609: ...upported OSPFv3 will always consider the link type to be broadcast Example The following command adds the VLAN accounting enabling OSPFv3 on the interface to the area 0 0 0 1 with an instance ID of 2...

Page 1610: ...sociated with it in one OSPFv3 domain However the same interface can be associated with another OSPFv3 domain with a different instance ID An interface associated with two OSPFv3 domains cannot have s...

Page 1611: ...X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1611 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 2 Platform Availabilit...

Page 1612: ...to the backbone Specify the following router identifier Far end router identifier a four byte dotted decimal number area identifier Transit area used for connecting the two end points The transit area...

Page 1613: ...llowing command is used to summarize a certain range of IP addresses within an area and export them out as a single address to area 0 0 0 1 configure ospfv3 area 0 0 0 1 add range 2aaa 456 3ffe 64 adv...

Page 1614: ...the default cost needs to be overwritten The interface cost is advertised as the link cost in router LSA Example The following command configures the cost of area 0 0 0 1 to 10 All the links of this...

Page 1615: ...s are configured Usage Guidelines If you attempt to delete a range that was not configured you will receive an error message Example The following command is used to delete a summary network from area...

Page 1616: ...h memory to hold the entire AS external LSAa should configure an external area filter to drop part of the external LSAs Configuring this policy will enable routers with limited resources to be put int...

Page 1617: ...XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1617 then deny Example The following command configures an external filter policy nosales for area 1 2 3 4 configure ospfv3 area 1 2 3 4 external filter nosales Histor...

Page 1618: ...e the size of link state database of routers belonging to the area Using the none mode specifies that no external filter is applied Policy files for this command will only recognize the following poli...

Page 1619: ...entry two if match any nlri 2001 db8 444 48 nlri 2001 db8 541f 65bd 64 then permit Example The following command configures an inter area filter policy nosales for area 1 2 3 4 configure ospfv3 area...

Page 1620: ...ea that is not any of the following Stub area NSSA Virtual links can be configured through normal areas External routes can be distributed into normal areas Example The following command configures an...

Page 1621: ...ed router The one with the higher priority takes precedence If there is a tie the router with the higher router ID takes precedence Setting the value to 0 ensures that the router is never selected as...

Page 1622: ...distributed into stub areas Stub areas are used to reduce memory consumption requirements on OSPFv3 routers Example The following command configures an OSPFv3 area as a stub area configure ospfv3 are...

Page 1623: ...issions will result transit delay The transit delay must be greater than 0 hello interval Smaller times allow routers to discover each other more quickly but also increase network traffic dead interva...

Page 1624: ...xpected round trip delay between any two routers on the attached network The setting of this parameter must be conservative or needless retransmission will result NOTE The wait interval for the interf...

Page 1625: ...VLANs or tunnels router interfaces Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables OSPFv3 on VLAN accounting configure ospfv3 delete vlan accounting History...

Page 1626: ...ted to the backbone Specify the following router identifier Far end router identifier a four byte dotted decimal number area identifier Transit area used for connecting the two end points The transit...

Page 1627: ...y cannot be used to filter routes from being added to the routing table It can only be used to change the attributes of routes Policy files for this command will only recognize the following policy at...

Page 1628: ...upports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1628 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms w...

Page 1629: ...an already configured interface from one area to another The instance ID associated with the interface will be unchanged Example The following command moves the VLAN accounting to the OSPFv3 area 0 0...

Page 1630: ...ult cost needs to be overwritten The interface cost is advertised as the link cost in router LSA Example The following command configures the cost metric of the VLAN accounting configure ospfv3 vlan a...

Page 1631: ...one with the higher priority takes precedence If there is a tie the router with the higher router ID takes precedence Setting the value to 0 ensures that the router is never selected as the designated...

Page 1632: ...s will result transit delay The transit delay must be greater than 0 hello interval Smaller times allow routers to discover each other more quickly but also increase network traffic dead interval This...

Page 1633: ...fic will ensue The retransmit interval must be greater than the expected round trip delay between any two routers on the attached network The setting of this parameter must be conservative or needless...

Page 1634: ...s The default cost is 40 10 Gbps The default cost is 20 Usage Guidelines The value of the costs cannot be greater for higher speed interfaces In other words the following condition must be true cost_1...

Page 1635: ...d from IPv4 to IPv6 the router ID format has not It is recommended that you manually set the router ID of the switches participating in OSPFv3 instead of having the switch automatically choose its rou...

Page 1636: ...upports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1636 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms w...

Page 1637: ...frequently This will reduce the CPU load but will cause delay in routes getting updated in the IP routing table Setting the interval too low will decreases the interval between SPF calculations but w...

Page 1638: ...ting traffic will ensue The setting of the retransmit interval should be conservative or needless retransmissions will result The value should be larger for serial lines and virtual links The transmit...

Page 1639: ...onfigurable It is always equal to the dead interval Example The following command sets the timers on the virtual link to router 6 6 6 6 transiting area 0 0 0 2 configure ospfv3 virtual link 6 6 6 6 ar...

Page 1640: ...rea 0 0 0 0 Usage Guidelines Area 0 0 0 0 does not need to be created It exists by default Example The following command creates a non backbone OSPFv3 area create ospfv3 area 1 2 3 4 History This comm...

Page 1641: ...Guidelines An OSPFv3 area cannot be deleted if it has an associated interface Also area 0 0 0 0 cannot be deleted Example The following command deletes an OSPFv3 area delete ospfv3 area 1 2 3 4 Histo...

Page 1642: ...Description Disables OSPFv3 for the router Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables OSPFv3 for the router disable ospfv3 History This command was fir...

Page 1643: ...isabled Usage Guidelines Use this command to stop OSPFv3 from exporting routes derived from other protocols Example The following command disables OSPFv3 to export RIPng routes to other OSPFv3 routers...

Page 1644: ...led When OSPFv3 is disabled it will release all the run time allocated resources like adjacencies link state advertisements run time memory etc OSPFv3 can be enabled successfully if and only if At lea...

Page 1645: ...quirements for using a tag The tag value in this instance has no relationship with 802 1Q VLAN tagging NOTE Setting the tag value is not supported in this release The same cost type and tag values can...

Page 1646: ...01 db8 200 300 64 nlri 2001 db8 2146 23d1 64 nlri 2001 db8 af31 3d0 64 nlri 2001 db8 f6 2341 64 then deny entry second if match any nlri 2001 db8 304 48 nlri 2001 db8 ca11 48 nlri 2001 db8 da36 48 nlr...

Page 1647: ...OSPF Enabled RouterId 20 0 0 1 RouterId Selection Automatic ASBR Yes ABR Yes ExtLSAs 3 ExtLSAChecksum 0x19420 OriginateNewLSAs 37 ReceivedNewLSAs 12 SpfHoldTime 10s Num of Areas 5 10M Cost 100 100M Co...

Page 1648: ...upports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1648 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms w...

Page 1649: ...Num LSA Metric ABR ASBR Intf Runs LSAs Checksum 0 0 0 0 NORM 0 0 1 7 7 0x3155b 1 0 0 0 NORM 1 1 1 6 9 0x4793d 2 0 0 0 NORM 0 0 1 5 10 0x47174 3 0 0 0 NORM 1 0 1 3 12 0x420cf 5 0 0 0 NORM 1 0 1 4 10 0x...

Page 1650: ...R 0 0 0 65 20 0 0 1 accounts E DR 80 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 finance E BDR 90 0 0 7 66 0 0 4 engineering E ODR 192 168 0 1 165 0 0 3 Corporate E ODR 201 0 16 6 204 0 0 1 Inter Area route Filter ospfSummPolicy E...

Page 1651: ...es show ospfv3 interfaces The following is sample output from the command VLAN Tunnel IPv6 Address AREA ID Flags Cost State Neighbors ixia 4 5 6 7 1 64 2 0 0 0 rif 5 A DR 1 to jmpr 111 222 333 7 48 5...

Page 1652: ...Instance ID 0 State BDR Number of state chg 2 Hello due in 3s Number of events 3 Total Num of Nbrs 1 Nbrs in FULL State 1 Hellos Rxed 94 Hellos Txed 94 DB Description Rxed 4 DB Description Txed 3 LSA...

Page 1653: ...and only the results matching all of the criteria are displayed This allows you to control the displayed entries in large routing tables A common use of this command is to omit all optional parameters...

Page 1654: ...ter the display using either the area ID the remote router ID or the link state ID The default setting is all with no detail If detail is specified each entry includes complete LSA information Example...

Page 1655: ...earch criteria and only the results matching all of the criteria are displayed This allows you to control the displayed entries in large routing tables A common use of this command is to omit all opti...

Page 1656: ...filter the display using either the area ID the remote router ID or the link state ID The default setting is all Example The following command displays all areas and all types in a summary format show...

Page 1657: ...Displays OSPFv3 specific memory usage Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays OSPFv3 specific memory for all types show ospfv3 memory detail History...

Page 1658: ...d all OSPFv3 neighbors are displayed Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays information about the OSPFv3 neighbors on the VLAN accounting show ospfv3 neighbor vlan accounting His...

Page 1659: ...a used for connecting the two end points The transit area cannot have an area identifier of 0 0 0 0 and cannot be a stub or NSSA area Example The following command displays information about the virtu...

Page 1660: ...ly This command selectively resets the configurable parameters to their default values The following is the list of parameters whose values will be reset to their defaults Interface Hello Interval Dea...

Page 1661: ...llowing command resets the OSPFv3 interface to the default settings on the VLAN accounting unconfigure ospfv3 accounting The following command unconfigures the parameters of the area 0 0 0 1 and all i...

Page 1662: ...OSPFv3 Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1662...

Page 1663: ...upgraded to a Core license See the section Software Licensing in chapter 1 ExtremeWare XOS Overview in the ExtremeWare XOS Concepts Guide for more information about licensing BGP Attributes The follow...

Page 1664: ...export subconfed BGP Features This section lists BGP features supported by ExtremeWare XOS Route Reflectors Route Confederations Route Aggregation Using the Loopback Interface BGP Peer Groups BGP Rout...

Page 1665: ...s Out total msgs In updates Out updates Last error FsmTransitions The command clear counters will also reset all counter for all BGP neighbors For BGP the clear counters command is equivalent to the f...

Page 1666: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1666 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1667: ...equal to or greater than maskLength irrespective of their network address The option network any netMaskLen exact will clear the statistics for all BGP routes whose mask length is exactly equal to mas...

Page 1668: ...clears the flap statistics for a specified neighbor clear bgp neighbor 10 10 10 10 flap statistics all History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The any netMaskLen options were...

Page 1669: ...ing table To use BGP route aggregation follow these steps 1 Enable aggregation using the following command enable bgp aggregation 2 Create an aggregate route using the following commands configure bgp...

Page 1670: ...800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1670 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 This command required an Advanced Core license in ExtremeWare XOS 1...

Page 1671: ...lly when BGP is used as an interior gateway protocol One way to reduce the size of a fully meshed AS is to divide the AS into multiple sub autonomous systems and group them into a routing confederatio...

Page 1672: ...table The enable bgp export command redistributes an individual route from the routing table to BGP If you use both commands to redistribute routes the routes redistributed using the network command t...

Page 1673: ...x Description Default N A Usage Guidelines BGP must be disabled before the AS number can be changed Example The following command changes the local AS number used by BGP configure bgp AS number 65001...

Page 1674: ...s Extreme Networks recommends disabling BGP before configuring the cluster ID Example The following command appends a BGP route reflector cluster ID to the cluster list of a route configure bgp cluste...

Page 1675: ...e size of a fully meshed AS is to divide the AS into multiple sub autonomous systems and group them into a routing confederation Within the confederation each sub AS must be fully meshed The confedera...

Page 1676: ...d as a single route Aggregation reduces the amount of information that a BGP speaker must store and exchange with other BGP speakers Reducing the information that is stored and exchanged also reduces...

Page 1677: ...t scale well especially when BGP is used as an interior gateway protocol One way to reduce the size of a fully meshed AS is to divide the AS into multiple sub autonomous systems and group them into a...

Page 1678: ...t is the default Usage Guidelines None Example The following command deletes a network to be originated from this router configure bgp delete network 192 1 1 12 30 History This command was first avail...

Page 1679: ...ly supported and is not recommended for use Higher priority values lower the chance of an IGP export to be automatically disabled in case BGP or the system goes to a low memory condition Example The f...

Page 1680: ...800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1680 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 This command required an Advanced Core license in ExtremeWare XOS 1...

Page 1681: ...policy An import policy is used to modify route attributes while adding BGP routes to the IP route table Example The following command configures a policy imprt_plcy for BGP configure bgp import polic...

Page 1682: ...on the following precedence from highest to lowest higher weight higher local preference shortest length shortest AS path lowest origin code lowest MED route from external peer lowest cost to Next Hop...

Page 1683: ...11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1683 Platform Availability This command is available on plat...

Page 1684: ...following precedence from highest to lowest higher weight higher local preference shortest length shortest AS path lowest origin code lowest MED route from external peer lowest cost to Next Hop lowes...

Page 1685: ...lty value below which a route will be used again The range is 1 20 000 and the default is 750 The suppress limit is the penalty value above which a route will be suppressed The range is 1 20 000 and t...

Page 1686: ...emoteaddr all address family ipv4 unicast ipv4 multicast no dampening Example The following command configures route flap dampening to the BGP neighbor at 192 168 1 22 to the default values configure...

Page 1687: ...ion or when you specify a particular neighbor Enclose the string in double quotes if there are any blank spaces in the string The maximum length of the string is 56 characters If you do not specify th...

Page 1688: ...ng command configure bgp peer group maximum prefix remoteaddr Specifies an IP address of a BGP neighbor all Specifies all neighbors address family The address family BGP supports two address families...

Page 1689: ...aximum number of IP prefixes accepted from all neighbors to 5000 sets the threshold for warning messages to 60 and specifies SNMP traps configure bgp neighbor all maximum prefix 5000 threshold 60 send...

Page 1690: ...g command configures the next hop address used in the updates to be the address of the BGP connection originating it configure bgp neighbor 172 16 5 25 next hop self History This command was first ava...

Page 1691: ...BGP neighbors configure bgp neighbor all remoteaddr address family ipv4 unicast ipv4 multicast dampening half life half life minutes reuse limit reuse limit number suppress limit suppress limit number...

Page 1692: ...s of a peer group are applied to all neighbors in the peer group To change any one of the following parameters you must disable and re enable the peer session timer source interface soft in reset pass...

Page 1693: ...kDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1693 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 This command required an Advanced Core license in Extreme...

Page 1694: ...lues are not reset to those the neighbor had before it inherited the peer group values To create a new neighbor and add it to a BGP peer group use the following command create bgp neighbor remoteaddr...

Page 1695: ...OS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1695 Platform Availability This command is available on pl...

Page 1696: ...the path attributes associated with it when exchanging updates with the neighbor Example The following command configures the route policy filter for a neighbor based on the policy nosales configure b...

Page 1697: ...The neighbor must be in the same AS as the router When changing the route reflector status of a peer the peer will automatically be disabled and re enabled and a warning message will appear on the co...

Page 1698: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1698 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1699: ...ity is a group of BGP destinations that require common handling ExtremeWare XOS supports the following well known BGP community attributes no export no advertise no export subconfed Example The follow...

Page 1700: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1700 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1701: ...and is not recommended for use Higher priority values lower the chance of a BGP neighbor to be automatically disabled in case BGP or the system goes to a low memory condition Example The following co...

Page 1702: ...performed The soft reset input command will trigger the generation of a route refresh message to be sent to the neighbor As a response to the Route Refresh message the neighbor will send the entire BG...

Page 1703: ...ckDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1703 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 This command required an Advanced Core license in Extrem...

Page 1704: ...ress must be a valid IP address of any VLAN configured on the switch Example The following command changes the BGP source interface to 10 43 55 10 configure bgp neighbor 192 168 1 5 source interface i...

Page 1705: ...P protocol must be disabled before changing the timer values Example The following command configures the BGP neighbor timers configure bgp neighbor 192 168 1 5 timer keep alive 120 hold time 360 Hist...

Page 1706: ...re preferable when multiple routes are available to the same network The range is 0 to 65 535 BGP selects routes based on the following precedence from highest to lowest higher weight higher local pre...

Page 1707: ...11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1707 Platform Availability This command is available on plat...

Page 1708: ...e limit is the penalty value below which a route will be used again The range is 1 20 000 and the default is 750 The suppress limit is the penalty value above which a route will be suppressed The rang...

Page 1709: ...ning for a BGP peer group configure bgp peer group peer group name no dampening Example The following command configures route flap dampening for the BGP peer group outer configure bgp peer group oute...

Page 1710: ...igure the neighbors use the following command configure bgp neighbor 192 168 1 1 maximum prefix name Specifies a peer group address family The address family BGP supports two address families IPv4 Uni...

Page 1711: ...um number of IP prefixes accepted from the peer group outer to 5000 sets the threshold for warning messages to 60 and specifies SNMP traps configure bgp peer group outer maximum prefix 5000 threshold...

Page 1712: ...The following command configures the next hop address used in the updates to be the address of the BGP connection originating it configure bgp peer group outer next hop self History This command was...

Page 1713: ...ute flap dampening for a BGP peer group configure bgp peer group peer group name address family ipv4 unicast ipv4 multicast dampening half life half life minutes reuse limit reuse limit number supress...

Page 1714: ...ute reflector The peer group must be in the same AS of this router Example The following command configures the peer group outer as a route reflector client configure bgp peer group outer route reflec...

Page 1715: ...gs apply to the peer group and all neighbors of the peer group Example The following command configures communities to be sent to neighbors as part of route updates configure bgp peer group outer send...

Page 1716: ...ll neighbors in the peer group Modifying the following parameters automatically disables and enables the neighbors before changes take effect remote as timer source interface soft in reset password Ex...

Page 1717: ...eer group are applied to all neighbors in the peer group Modifying the following parameters automatically disables and enables the neighbors before changes take effect remote as timer source interface...

Page 1718: ...Example The following command configures the route policy for the peer group outer and its neighbors using the policy nosales configure bgp peer group outer route policy in nosales History This comma...

Page 1719: ...side of the router This command does not affect configuration of the switch Changes made to the parameters of a peer group are applied to all neighbors in the peer group Modifying the following param...

Page 1720: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1720 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1721: ...ss of a VLAN configured on the switch Changes made to the parameters of a peer group are applied to all neighbors in the peer group Modifying the following parameters automatically disables and enable...

Page 1722: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1722 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1723: ...pplied to all neighbors in the peer group Modifying the following parameters automatically disables and enables the neighbors before changes take effect remote as timer source interface soft in reset...

Page 1724: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1724 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1725: ...dence from highest to lowest higher weight higher local preference shortest length shortest AS path lowest origin code lowest MED route from external peer lowest cost to Next Hop lowest routerID Examp...

Page 1726: ...be a receiver only which helps a restarting BGP router to perform the graceful restart process and not to do graceful restarts itself This command cannot be used while BGP is enabled globally on the...

Page 1727: ...f that address family during a graceful restart The local OPEN message will contain all the added address families This command cannot be used while BGP is enabled globally on the switch NOTE For BGP...

Page 1728: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1728 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1729: ...This timer is started on the receiver router when it detects the neighbor router is restarting usually when the peer TCP session is reset At that time routes from the restarting router are marked as...

Page 1730: ...econds Usage Guidelines This command configures the stale route timer This timer is started when the restarting BGP peer goes to the ESTABLISHED state after it restarts The timer is stopped when the r...

Page 1731: ...ion Default The default is 600 seconds Usage Guidelines This command configures the update delay timer Usually a restarting router waits to receive EOR messages from all the receiving BGP neighbors be...

Page 1732: ...following precedence from highest to lowest higher weight higher local preference shortest length shortest AS path lowest origin code lowest MED route from external peer lowest cost to Next Hop lowes...

Page 1733: ...t and redistribution Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines This command does not affect the switch configuration Example The following command appl...

Page 1734: ...roup name none acquire all If you do not specify acquire all only the mandatory parameters are inherited from the peer group If you specify acquire all all of the parameters of the peer group are inhe...

Page 1735: ...BGP peer otherwise the neighbor is an EBGP peer The BGP session to a newly created peer is not started until the enable bgp neighbor command is issued Example The following command creates a new BGP p...

Page 1736: ...e parameters of the BGP peer group The following mandatory parameters are shared by all neighbors in a peer group remote AS source interface out route policy send community next hop self Each BGP peer...

Page 1737: ...N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete one or all BGP neighbors Example The following command deletes the specified BGP neighbor delete bgp neighbor 192 168 1 17 History This command was fir...

Page 1738: ...ntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to delete a specific BGP peer group Example The following command deletes the peer group named outer delete bgp peer group outer History...

Page 1739: ...Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines Use this command to disable BGP on the router Example The following command disables BGP disable bgp History T...

Page 1740: ...routes so that they are advertised as a single route Aggregation reduces the amount of information that a BGP speaker must store and exchange with other BGP speakers Reducing the information that is...

Page 1741: ...rom neighbors in different AS Usage Guidelines The MED is one of the parameters that is considered when selecting the best path among many alternative paths The path with a lower MED is preferred over...

Page 1742: ...d commands Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines Using this command communities are displayed as a single decimal value Example The following...

Page 1743: ...to OSPF Similarly for BGP and ISIS or BGP and RIP You can use policies to associate BGP attributes including Community NextHop MED Origin and Local Preference with the routes Policies can also be use...

Page 1744: ...1744 Example The following command disables BGP from exporting routes from the OSPF protocol to BGP peers disable bgp export ospf History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 This...

Page 1745: ...s After the session has been disabled all the information in the route information base RIB for the neighbor is flushed Example The following command disables the BGP session disable bgp neighbor 192...

Page 1746: ...to inter operate with Cisco routers for BGP graceful restart you must enable IPv4 unicast address capability This command disables BGP Multiprotocol and route refresh capabilities for one or all neigh...

Page 1747: ...S 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1747 Platform Availability This command is available on pla...

Page 1748: ...not have officially allocated AS numbers You want to conserve AS numbers if you are multi homed to the local AS Private AS numbers should not be advertised on the Internet Private AS numbers can only...

Page 1749: ...ut reset feature can potentially limit the amount of system memory consumed by the RIB in This command can be issued only when both BGP and the BGP neighbor is disabled Example The following command d...

Page 1750: ...router alert option in a BGP message forces intermediate routers to examine the packet very closely and therefore indirectly gives greater reliability that a packet will be delivered to its destinati...

Page 1751: ...BGP peer group and all its BGP neighbors Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables the BGP peer group outer disable bgp peer group outer History...

Page 1752: ...art you must enable IPv4 unicast address capability This command disables BGP Multiprotocol and route refresh capabilities for a peer group Once the capabilities are enabled the BGP peer will announce...

Page 1753: ...te autonomous system AS numbers from the AS_Path attribute of outbound updates Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables the BGP peer group outer...

Page 1754: ...ast is the default Usage Guidelines Disabling the soft input reset feature can potentially limit the amount of system memory consumed by the RIB in Example The following command disables the soft inpu...

Page 1755: ...uter alert IP option in outgoing BGP messages to the specified peer group Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables the feature for the peer grou...

Page 1756: ...s Default Disabled Usage Guidelines This command enables the Border Gateway Protocol BGP on the router Before invoking this command the local AS number and BGP router ID must be configured Example The...

Page 1757: ...e with other BGP speakers Reducing the information that is stored and exchanged also reduces the size of the routing table To use BGP route aggregation follow these steps 1 Enable aggregation using th...

Page 1758: ...s only used when comparing paths from the same AS unless always compare med is enabled When this command is issued MEDs from different AS are used in comparing paths A MED value of zero is treated as...

Page 1759: ...and upload commands Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If not enabled the communities are displayed as a single decimal value Example The f...

Page 1760: ...u can use a policy to associate BGP attributes including Community NextHop MED Origin and Local Preference with the routes A policy can also be used to filter out exported routes Using the export comm...

Page 1761: ...Guide 1761 Example The following command enables BGP to export routes from the OSPF protocol to BGP peers enable bgp export ospf History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 This...

Page 1762: ...age Guidelines To create a new neighbor and add it to a BGP peer group use the following command create bgp neighbor remoteaddr peer group peer group name multi hop Example The following command enabl...

Page 1763: ...ver to inter operate with Cisco routers for BGP graceful restart you must enable IPv4 unicast address capability This command enables BGP Multiprotocol and route refresh capabilities for one or all ne...

Page 1764: ...ports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1764 Platform Availability This command is available on platforms wit...

Page 1765: ...mote AS does not have officially allocated AS numbers You want to conserve AS numbers if you are multi homed to the local AS Private AS numbers should not be advertised on the Internet Private AS numb...

Page 1766: ...feature can potentially limit the amount of system memory consumed by the RIB in This command can be issued only when both BGP and the BGP neighbor is disabled Example The following command enables t...

Page 1767: ...IP layer of ExtremeWare XOS to insert the IP Router Alert Option field in all the outbound BGP messages IP packets with IP Router Alert option in them examined closely by all the intermediate routers...

Page 1768: ...within the peer group inherit the parameters of the BGP peer group The following mandatory parameters are shared by all neighbors in a peer group remote AS source interface out nlri filter out aspath...

Page 1769: ...ul restart you must enable IPv4 unicast address capability This command enables BGP Multiprotocol and route refresh capabilities for a peer group After the capabilities have been enabled the BGP peer...

Page 1770: ...m AS numbers from the AS_Path attribute of outbound updates Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command enables the BGP peer group outer from removing priva...

Page 1771: ...d IPv4 unicast is the default Usage Guidelines Disabling the soft input reset feature can potentially limit the amount of system memory consumed by the RIB in Example The following command enables the...

Page 1772: ...tion in outgoing BGP messages to the specified peer group Syntax Description Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command enables the feature for the peer group outer enable bg...

Page 1773: ...es Default N A Usage Guidelines Displays information such as AS number router ID local preference sync flag route reflection cluster ID confederation ID and AS redistributed networks Example The follo...

Page 1774: ...about a specific BGP neighbor If you do not specify a neighbor information about all neighbors is displayed Example The following command displays information about a specified neighbor show bgp neig...

Page 1775: ...se mask length is equal to or greater than maskLength irrespective of their network address remoteaddr Specifies an IP address that identifies a BGP neighbor address family The address family BGP supp...

Page 1776: ...gth irrespective of their network address Example The following command displays information about a specified neighbor s dampened routes show bgp neighbor 10 10 10 10 flap statistics all History This...

Page 1777: ...accepted routes Specifies that only accepted routes should be displayed received routes Specifies that only received routes should be displayed rejected routes Specifies that only rejected routes shou...

Page 1778: ...ork address The option network any netMaskLen exact will display all BGP routes whose mask length is exactly equal to maskLength irrespective of their network address Example The following command dis...

Page 1779: ...the peer group which are different from the ones that are configured in the peer group will be displayed If no peer group name is specified all the peer group information will be displayed Example The...

Page 1780: ...maskLength irrespective of their network address The option network any netMaskLen exact will display all BGP routes whose mask length is exactly equal to maskLength irrespective of their network addr...

Page 1781: ...The following command displays the BGP route information base RIB show bgp routes all History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The any netMaskLen options were added in ExtremeW...

Page 1782: ...s family is specified IPv4 unicast is the default Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays a summary of the BGP route information base RIB for IPv4 multicast show bgp routes summar...

Page 1783: ...yntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays BGP specific memory for all types show bgp memory detail History This command was first available in ExtremeW...

Page 1784: ...BGP Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1784...

Page 1785: ...if the group is still in use If the group is still active a single IP host responds to the query and group registration is maintained IGMPv2 is enabled by default on the switch and beginning in 11 2 E...

Page 1786: ...eceiving router gets the multicast directly from the sending router and bypasses the RP NOTE You can run either PIM DM or PIM SM per VLAN PIM SSM PIM SM works well in many to many multicasting situati...

Page 1787: ...t group in the PIM SM domain The PMBR also forwards PIM SM traffic to a PIM DM network The PMBR sends a join message to the RP and the PMBR floods traffic from the RP into the PIM DM network No comman...

Page 1788: ...l IGMP groups Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command can be used by network operations to manually remove learned IGMP group entries instantly Example The following command clear...

Page 1789: ...However removing an IGMP snooping entry can disrupt the normal forwarding of multicast traffic until the snooping entries are learned again The static and dynamic IGMP snooping entries will be removed...

Page 1790: ...is command can be used by network operators to manually remove IPMC software and hardware forwarding cache entries instantly If the stream is available caches will be re created otherwise caches are r...

Page 1791: ...ueries The range is 1 to 429 496 729 seconds query response interval The maximum response time inserted into the periodic general queries The range is 1 to 25 seconds last member query interval The ma...

Page 1792: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1792 Platform Availability This command is ava...

Page 1793: ...n multicast streams are to be treated specially Typically if the switch receives a stream with a destination address which is in the policy file in permit mode that stream will be software flooded and...

Page 1794: ...forwarding with respect to IGMP PIM or DVMRP so it should be used with caution Slow path flooding will be done within the L2 VLAN only Use the none option to effectively disable slow path flooding Yo...

Page 1795: ...ues of one second or less you must set the leave timeout to a multiple of 100 ms For values of more than one second you must set the leave timeout to a multiple of 1000 ms one second The specified tim...

Page 1796: ...fault setting is 260 seconds host timeout The maximum time in seconds that a group snooping entry can remain in the IGMP snooping table without receiving a group report If a report is not received the...

Page 1797: ...s in place of those generated by a real host The proxy messages use the VLAN IP address for source address of the messages If the VLAN has no IP address assigned the proxy IGMP message will use 0 0 0...

Page 1798: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1798 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform...

Page 1799: ...created by the following command configure igmp snooping vlan vlan name ports portlist add static group ip address Example The following command removes a static IGMP entry that forwards the multicas...

Page 1800: ...effect this command emulates a multicast router attached to those ports As long as the ports are configured with the static entry all available multicast traffic will be forwarded to those ports Exam...

Page 1801: ...ne Usage Guidelines Use this command to remove an entry created by the following command configure igmp snooping vlan vlanname ports portlist add static router Example The following command removes th...

Page 1802: ...ontains the class D addresses of the multicast groups that you wish to block To remove IGMP snooping filtering from a port use the none keyword version of the command Use the following template to cre...

Page 1803: ...mmand Reference Guide 1803 permit Example The following command configures the policy file ap_multicast to filter multicast packets forwarded to VLAN marketing on ports 2 1 2 4 configure igmp snooping...

Page 1804: ...ding through MVR By default some ports on non MVR VLANs router ports primary and secondary EAPS ports are excluded from the MVR cache egress list This command is used to override these rules so that i...

Page 1805: ...ess range is received on the VLAN it is leaked to all other VLAN ports where the corresponding IGMP join message is received By default the entire multicast address range 224 0 0 0 4 except for the mu...

Page 1806: ...on Default N A Usage Guidelines This command is used to delete a group of virtual ports for multicast forwarding through MVR After using this command the ports will revert to the default forwarding ru...

Page 1807: ...onfigure mvr delete vlan vlan name Description Deletes a VLAN from MVR Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines Removes MVR from the specified VLAN Example The following command configures VLAN...

Page 1808: ...ange 224 0 0 0 24 is used for MVR MVR must first be configured on the VLAN before using this command If the policy is later refreshed groups denied and newly allowed groups in the policy will be flush...

Page 1809: ...ly the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1809 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platfor...

Page 1810: ...irst be configured on the VLAN before using this command The following is a sample policy file mvrpol pol This policy configures 236 1 1 0 24 as the MVR static group address range Any MVR addresses ou...

Page 1811: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1811 Platform Availability This command is a...

Page 1812: ...ces can run dense mode while others run sparse mode Passive interfaces are host only interfaces that allow a multicast stream from other VLANs to be forwarded to edge hosts Since they do not peer with...

Page 1813: ...xtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1813 Platform Availability This command is ava...

Page 1814: ...must have PIM enabled for it to take effect After PIM is enabled CBSRs advertise themselves in the PIM domain A BSR is elected among all the candidates based on CBSR priority The break the tie among...

Page 1815: ...or the same group range The policy file contains a list of multicast group addresses served by this RP This policy file is not used for filtering purposes As used with this command the policy file is...

Page 1816: ...t X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1816 nlri 232 232 0 0 20 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1...

Page 1817: ...ntax Description Default The default is 60 seconds Usage Guidelines Increasing this time will result in increased convergence time for CRP information to the PIM routers Example The following command...

Page 1818: ...ent on all routers This policy file is not used for filtering purposes As used with this command the policy file is just a container for a list of addresses So a typical policy file used for RP config...

Page 1819: ...y the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1819 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform...

Page 1820: ...gure pim delete vlan vlanname all Description Disables PIM on an interface Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command disables PIM on VLAN accounting configure...

Page 1821: ...value is configured the first hop switch sends a few register messages and then waits for a corresponding register stop from RP for time seconds The process is repeated until the register stop is rec...

Page 1822: ...default a null register is sent every 55 seconds register suppress interval register probe interval A response to the null register is expected within register probe interval By specifying a larger i...

Page 1823: ...ta for compatibility with Cisco Systems products or to exclude data for RFC compliant operation in the register message Syntax Description Default Include data Usage Guidelines None Example The follow...

Page 1824: ...s On the RP this setting is based on register packets Syntax Description Default The default setting is 0 for both parameters Usage Guidelines For the best performance use default value of 0 Example T...

Page 1825: ...M range you must first unconfigure the existing range and then configure the new range SSM requires that hosts use IGMPv3 messages to register to receive multicast group packets When a range is config...

Page 1826: ...mmand Reference Guide 1826 Example The following command sets the PIM SSM range to 232 0 0 0 8 and 233 0 0 0 8 if the policy file ssmrange pol contains the policy example used above configure pim ssm...

Page 1827: ...elines These default timers should only be adjusted when excess PIM control packets are observed on the interface Example The following command configures the PIM timers on the VLAN accounting configu...

Page 1828: ...cess policy capabilities are by nature different When the PIM protocol is used for routing IP multicast traffic the switch can be configured to use an policy file to determine trusted PIM router neigh...

Page 1829: ...e router queries the multicast group to see if the group is still in use If the group is still active hosts respond to the query and group registration is maintained IGMP is enabled by default on the...

Page 1830: ...hanges the mode so that all multicast traffic is forwarded to any IP router If not in the forward mcrouter mode the command disable igmp snooping forward mcrouter only has no effect To change the snoo...

Page 1831: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1831 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 Platform...

Page 1832: ...l configured IP interfaces are affected When new IP interfaces are added IP multicast forwarding is disabled by default IP forwarding must be enabled before enabling IP multicast forwarding Disabling...

Page 1833: ...1833 disable mvr disable mvr Description Disables MVR on the system Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command d...

Page 1834: ...uide 1834 disable pim disable pim Description Disables PIM on the system Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following comm...

Page 1835: ...the specified layer 3 VLAN IGMPv3 include messages for multicast addresses in the SSM range will only be processed by PIM if PIM SSM is enabled on the interface Any non IGMPv3 messages in the SSM ran...

Page 1836: ...respond to the query and group registration is maintained IGMPv2 is enabled by default on the switch However the switch can be configured to disable the generation and processing of IGMP packets IGMP...

Page 1837: ...lticast traffic floods within a given VLAN If a VLAN is specified IGMP snooping is enabled only on that VLAN otherwise IGMP snooping is enabled on all VLANs This command applies to both IGMPv2 and IGM...

Page 1838: ...only mode to the forward mcrouter only mode use the commands disable ipmcforwarding enable igmp snooping forward mcrouter only enable ipmcforwarding vlan name To change the IGMP snooping mode from the...

Page 1839: ...the duplicate join requests on a group to forward to the connected Layer 3 switch The proxy also suppresses unnecessary IGMP leave messages so that they are forwarded only when the last member leaves...

Page 1840: ...ion Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If no options are specified all configured IP interfaces are affected When new IP interfaces are added IPMC forwarding is disabled by default IP forwarding must b...

Page 1841: ...1841 enable mvr enable mvr Description Enables MVR on the system Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following command ena...

Page 1842: ...Guide 1842 enable pim enable pim Description Enables PIM on the system Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines None Example The following comma...

Page 1843: ...nterface for PIM to begin operating which includes enabling IP multicast forwarding IGMPv3 include messages for multicast addresses in the SSM range will only be processed by PIM if PIM SSM is enabled...

Page 1844: ...owing command displays the IGMP configuration show igmp The following is sample output from this command IGMP Query Interval 125 sec Max Response Time 10 sec Last Member Query 1 sec Robustness 2 IGMP...

Page 1845: ...5 24 fmiz 3 0 2 vcs8 12 2 8 115 24 fmiz 3 0 2 vhs1 0 0 0 0 0 U z 0 4 2 vhs2 117 2 2 115 24 fmiz 3 0 2 vhs3 117 2 3 115 24 fmiz 3 0 2 vhs4 117 2 4 115 24 fmiz 3 0 2 vms1 111 1 1 115 24 Ufmiz 6 7 2 Flag...

Page 1846: ...LANs are displayed You can also filter the display by group address and by multicast stream sender address Example The following command lists the IGMP group membership for the VLAN accounting show ig...

Page 1847: ...layed in a per interface format Group membership information Router entry Timeout information Sender entry Example The following command displays IGMP snooping registration information for the switch...

Page 1848: ...vms1 111 2 Yes 4 10 5 Yes gho 4061 0 Yes sqa_east 4059 0 Yes The following command displays IGMP snooping registration information on the VLAN accounting show igmp snooping vlan accounting Output fro...

Page 1849: ...elines Use this command to display IGMP snooping filters configured on the specified VLAN When no VLAN is specified all the filters will be displayed Example The following command displays the IGMP sn...

Page 1850: ...red on the specified VLAN When no VLAN is specified all the static groups or router ports will be displayed Example The following command displays the IGMP snooping static groups configured on VLAN vl...

Page 1851: ...he counters for the number of packets bridged switched and snooped Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command displays the counters for the number of packets br...

Page 1852: ...on Displays the MVR configuration on the switch Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines If a VLAN is specified information for the VLAN is displayed Example The following command displays the...

Page 1853: ...the multicast cache in the MVR range Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines If no VLAN is specified information for all the VLANs is displayed Example The following command displays the mult...

Page 1854: ...ing command displays the global PIM configuration and statistics show pim The following is sample output from the command PIM Enabled Version 2 PIM CRP Disabled BSR state ACCEPT_ANY BSR Hash Mask Leng...

Page 1855: ...detauk The following is sample output from the command PIM Enabled Version 2 PIM CRP Disabled BSR state ACCEPT_ANY BSR Hash Mask Length 255 255 255 252 Current BSR Info 0 0 0 0 Priority 0 Configured...

Page 1856: ...me out 105 sec Join Prune Interval 60 sec Join Prune holdtime 210 sec Trusted Gateway none CRP group List none with priority 0 Shutdown priority 1024 Source Specific Multicast Enabled Neighbor IP addr...

Page 1857: ...are XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1857 Platform Availability This command is available...

Page 1858: ...etail option is specified the switch displays the egress VLAN list and the pruned VLAN list Example The following command displays the PIM cache entry for group 239 255 255 1 show pim cache 239 255 25...

Page 1859: ...t cache 20 Entry flags R RP tree S Source tree W Any source Egress Pruned interface flags SM Sparse Mode DM Dense Mode Fw Forwarding PP Prune pending AL Assert Loser N Neighbor present I IGMP member p...

Page 1860: ...ets all IGMP settings to their default values and clears the IGMP group table Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following comm...

Page 1861: ...ntax Description Default If no VLAN is specified the configuration is reset for all PIM interfaces Usage Guidelines If you unconfigure PIM you will also unconfigure PIM SSM removing the PIM SSM range...

Page 1862: ...SSM range is configured Usage Guidelines You must disable PIM before configuring or unconfiguring a PIM SSM range Use the disable pim command Initially no range is configured for SSM After a range is...

Page 1863: ...M A method for the IPv6 host to communicate its multicast group membership to a router for example Multicast Listener Discovery MLD NOTE You must configure IPv6 unicast routing before you configure IP...

Page 1864: ...moves one or all MLD groups Syntax Description Default N A Usage Guidelines This command is used to manually remove learned MLD group entries instantly Example The following command clears all MLD gro...

Page 1865: ...MLD snooping entries instantly However removing an MLD snooping entry can disrupt the normal forwarding of multicast traffic until the snooping entries are learned again The static and dynamic MLD sn...

Page 1866: ...queries The range is 1 to 429 496 729 seconds query response interval The maximum response time inserted into the periodic general queries The range is 1 to 25 seconds last member query interval The m...

Page 1867: ...meWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1867 Platform Availability This command is availab...

Page 1868: ...t group will be forwarded to that port The switch sends proxy MLD messages in place of those generated by a real host The proxy messages use the VLAN IPv6 address for source address of the messages If...

Page 1869: ...static group ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1869 Platform Availability This...

Page 1870: ...he following command configure mld snooping vlan vlanname ports portlist add static group v6grpipaddress Example The following command removes a static MLD entry so the multicast group ff02 a b will n...

Page 1871: ...VLAN ports In effect this command emulates a multicast router attached to those ports As long as the ports are configured with the static entry all available multicast traffic will be forwarded to th...

Page 1872: ...nd to remove the configuration that forwards all multicast groups to the specified VLAN ports Example The following command removes a static MLD entry so all multicast groups will not be forwarded to...

Page 1873: ...ticast streams are to be treated specially Typically if the switch receives a stream with a destination address which is in the policy file in permit mode that stream will be software flooded and no h...

Page 1874: ...d be used with caution Slow path flooding will be done within the L2 VLAN only Use the none option to effectively disable slow path flooding You can use the show mld command to see the configuration o...

Page 1875: ...or less you must set the leave timeout to a multiple of 100 ms For values of more than one second you must set the leave timeout to a multiple of 1000 ms one second The specified time is the maximum...

Page 1876: ...rs The default setting is 260 seconds MLD snooping is a layer 2 function of the switch It does not require multicast routing to be enabled The feature reduces the flooding of IPv6 multicast traffic On...

Page 1877: ...r ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1877 Platform Availability This command is...

Page 1878: ...lly the router queries the multicast group to see if the group is still in use If the group is still active hosts respond to the query and group registration is maintained MLD is enabled by default on...

Page 1879: ...ges the mode so that all multicast traffic is forwarded to any IP router If not in the forward mcrouter mode the command disable mld snooping forward mcrouter only has no effect The with proxy option...

Page 1880: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1880 Platform Availability This command is av...

Page 1881: ...es the multicast group to see if the group is still in use If the group is still active IPv6 hosts respond to the query and group registration is maintained MLDv1 is enabled by default on the switch H...

Page 1882: ...e switch forwards all multicast traffic to any IP router multicast or not and any active member port to the local network that has one or more subscribers NOTE The forward mcrouter only mode for MLD s...

Page 1883: ...BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1883 Example The following command enables MLD snooping on the switch enable mld snooping History This command was first a...

Page 1884: ...the proxy allows the switch to suppress the duplicate join requests on a group to forward to the connected Layer 3 switch The proxy also suppresses unnecessary MLD leave messages so that they are for...

Page 1885: ...the command displays the switch configuration Example The following command displays the MLD configuration show mld The following is sample output from this command MLD Query Interval 125 sec Max Res...

Page 1886: ...esses U Interface Up z MLD Snooping Enabled The following command displays the MLD configuration for the VLAN red show mld red The following is sample output from this command Interface on VLAN red is...

Page 1887: ...llowing command lists the MLD group membership for the VLAN accounting show mld group vtest3 Output from this command looks similar to the following Group Address Ver Vlan Port Age ff03 1 1 1 vtest3 4...

Page 1888: ...ace format Group membership information Router entry Timeout information Sender entry Example The following command displays MLD snooping registration information for the VLAN red show mld snooping vl...

Page 1889: ...eference Guide 1889 4 45 fe80 204 96ff fe1f a418 ff02 1 ff1f a418 11 4 45 fe80 204 96ff fe1f a418 ff02 1 ff22 112 11 4 45 fe80 201 30ff fef9 9b90 ff02 1 ff22 124 11 4 45 fe80 201 30ff fef9 9b90 All Gr...

Page 1890: ...splay the MLD snooping static groups or router ports configured on the specified VLAN When no VLAN is specified all the static groups or router ports will be displayed Example The following command di...

Page 1891: ...s all MLD settings to their default values and clears the MLD group table Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines None Example The following command...

Page 1892: ...IPv6 Multicast Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1892...

Page 1893: ...tch reboot The configuration is the customized set of parameters that you have selected to run on the switch As you make configuration changes the new settings are stored in run time memory To retain...

Page 1894: ...re image flashed into the hardware with the firmware image bundled with the ExtremeWare XOS image when you Download a new version of ExtremeWare XOS to the active partition Install a new module into a...

Page 1895: ...nstalling to MSM A Image installed successfully Installing version 1 0 0 16 of the MSM bootrom s Do you want to continue y n Yes Installing version 1 0 0 24 of the IO module bootrom s Do you want to c...

Page 1896: ...sure For more information please refer to the Extreme Networks Consolidated XOS Hardware Installation Guide Example The following command automatically upgrades the firmware when a newer firmware imag...

Page 1897: ...from Extreme Networks to a TFTP server on your network On the BlackDiamond 10808 switch you can also download the image to the external compact flash memory card Specify the ipaddress or hostname par...

Page 1898: ...habetical letters upper case and lower case A Z a z Numerals 0 9 Period Dash Permitted only for host names Underscore _ Permitted only for host names Colon When naming or configuring an IP address for...

Page 1899: ...le The following command downloads a bootROM image from the tftp server tftphost from the file bootimage download bootrom tftphost bootimage History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS...

Page 1900: ...to the external compact flash memory card hostname Specifies the hostname of the TFTP server from which the image should be obtained ipaddress Specifies the IP address of TFTP server from which the i...

Page 1901: ...e a xos file which contains an ExtremeWare XOS core image or a xmod file which contains an ExtremeWare XOS modular software package Modular software packages have additional functionality that supplem...

Page 1902: ...this occurs you must decide whether to continue the software download or move or delete the core dump files from the internal memory For example if you have a modular switch with an external memory c...

Page 1903: ...ge After verifying the virtual router that reaches your TFTP server specify that virtual router when you download the image Step 2 Viewing the Partition To view your selected and booted partition use...

Page 1904: ...e core image bd10K 11 0 0 25 xos To install a module to the inactive partition use the download image command to download the module to the inactive partition and use the install image command to inst...

Page 1905: ...age will be used at the next reboot The booted image partition indicates the image used at the last reboot It is the active partition The current state indicates which MSM is the primary displayed as...

Page 1906: ...ou can either continue the upgrade or cancel the action If you continue the upgrade the primary MSM downloads the new image to the I O module and reboots 5 Verify that the backup MSM comes up correctl...

Page 1907: ...rade Caveats for the BlackDiamond 8800 Series Switch Only The following is a summary of hitless upgrade caveats for only the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch When you initiate failover the MSM I O port...

Page 1908: ...1 0 0 25 xos download image 10 10 15 04 bd10K 11 0 0 25 xos Although the example command specifies a BlackDiamond 10808 image the output is similar on all modular switches On a modular switch if you d...

Page 1909: ...ive partition a reboot required Do you want to continue y n Yes Installing to primary partition If you answer yes to installing the image the switch reboots upon completion of the installation History...

Page 1910: ...contains the executable code Displaying the BootROM Versions To display the BootROM version for the switch and all of the modules and PSU controllers installed in a modular switch use the show versio...

Page 1911: ...10808 switch you see output similar to the following Installing bootrom Writing MSM B bootrom Verifying Flash contents bootrom written Writing MSM A bootrom Verifying Flash contents bootrom written Bo...

Page 1912: ...rts only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1912 Platform Availability This command is available only on the Summit...

Page 1913: ...with the firmware image bundled with the ExtremeWare XOS image You can also use the install firmware command to compare the firmware images On the BlackDiamond 12804 switch you must use the install fi...

Page 1914: ...ng is sample output from the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch Installing version 1 0 1 7 of the MSM bootrom s Do you want to continue y yes n no cr cancel Yes Do you want to save configuration changes...

Page 1915: ...and run this command on the new primary Additional Behavior BlackDiamond 8800 Series Switch Only During a firmware upgrade the switch prompts you to save your configuration changes to the current acti...

Page 1916: ...backup MSM using the run msm failover command 3 On the new primary MSM use the install firmware command to install the remaining firmware images 4 When the installation is complete return to your ori...

Page 1917: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1917 Platform Availability This command is available only on the BlackDiamond 8...

Page 1918: ...Image Versions To display the software image version running on the switch use the show version or show switch commands Local Filename Character Restrictions This section provides information about t...

Page 1919: ...ition must be of the same version as the module If you reboot the switch the module will also be activated but you can activate the module without rebooting the switch by issuing the run update comman...

Page 1920: ...iled information about hitless upgrade see the download image command Example The following command installs the software image file bd12K 11 4 0 26 xos on a BlackDiamond 12804 switch install image bd...

Page 1921: ...n known as the XOS CLI script file saves the XML based configuration in an ASCII format readable by a text editor After issuing this command the ASCII configuration quickly scrolls across the screen T...

Page 1922: ...d 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1922 Example The following command loads the ASCII formatted configuration named configbackup xsf load script configbackup xsf History...

Page 1923: ...package to the active partition use this command to make the update active This command causes the ExtremeWare XOS system to start the newly installed processes contained in the package without reboo...

Page 1924: ...le extension For more information about using ASCII formatted configuration files see the upload configuration hostname ipaddress filename vr vr name and the load script script file commands This comm...

Page 1925: ...witch then prompts you to select which configuration to use to bootup the system The following sample output is similar to the message displayed The current selected default configuration database to...

Page 1926: ...g the current default active configuration Example The following command saves the current switch configuration to the configuration file named XOS1 save configuration XOS1 The following command save...

Page 1927: ...ame ipaddress filename vr vr name and the load script script file commands If you specify show configuration without any keywords the switch displays configuration information for each of the switch m...

Page 1928: ...ies 256 configure iparp vr VR Control timeout 20 enable iparp vr VR Control checking enable iparp vr VR Control refresh This command shows the current configuration of the OSPF module in the switch sh...

Page 1929: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1929 Platform Availability This command is avail...

Page 1930: ...x Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines Use this command to verify if there is an external memory card in the switch Example This command shows whether a...

Page 1931: ...tch Both the backup and the primary MSMs must be running ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 or later BlackDiamond 8810 switch with 8800 original modules installed Both the backup and the primary MSMs must be runnin...

Page 1932: ...nd 8800 series switch the I O ports on the backup MSM go down when you synchronize the MSMs When the primary MSM finishes replicating its configurations and images to the backup MSM the I O ports on t...

Page 1933: ...it X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1933 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 0 Platform Availabil...

Page 1934: ...ent configuration including all switch parameters and reboot using the last used image and factory default configuration The command unconfigure switch all does not clear licensing information The lic...

Page 1935: ...ation file Enter n to not save the changes to your configuration file Local Filename Character Restrictions This section provides information about the characters supported by the switch for local and...

Page 1936: ...ng a local file remember the requirements previously described Example The following command uninstalls the software package bd10K 11 0 0 25 xos from the secondary partition uninstall image bd10K 11 0...

Page 1937: ...ownload a copy of the file to the same switch or to one or more different switches Send a copy of the configuration file to Extreme Networks Technical Support for problem solving purposes This command...

Page 1938: ...n ASCII formatted configuration file complete the following tasks 1 Upload the configuration to a network TFTP server using the following command upload configuration hostname ipaddress filename vr vr...

Page 1939: ...th a xsf extension is the ASCII configuration The following sample output contains an ASCII configuration file rw r r 1 root 0 98362 Nov 2 13 53 Nov022005 cfg rw r r 1 root 0 117136 Dec 12 12 56 epice...

Page 1940: ...e switch permits only the following characters Alphabetical letters upper case and lower case A Z a z Numerals 0 9 Period Dash Permitted only for host names Underscore _ Permitted only for host names...

Page 1941: ...the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1941 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 Platform...

Page 1942: ...ations They are just conveniences to specify the files primary cfg and secondary cfg When you configure the switch to use a previously saved configuration the switch displays the following message The...

Page 1943: ...configuration use the show switch command Local Filename Character Restrictions This section provides information about the characters supported by the switch for local filenames When specifying a lo...

Page 1944: ...nd if they are in the primary or the secondary partition Primary indicates the saved image in the primary partition secondary indicates the saved image in the secondary partition This command also spe...

Page 1945: ...hes and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1945 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 10 1 The msm parameter was added in ExtremeWar...

Page 1946: ...Configuration and Image Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1946...

Page 1947: ...Ethernet Automatic Protection Switching Protocol EAPS A switch running ELRP transmits multicast packets with special MAC destination address out of some or all of the ports belonging to a Virtual LAN...

Page 1948: ...dic ELRP requests If ELRP packets are received back a message is printed to the system log file and a trap is sent to the SNMP manager indicating detection of a network loop Details of using ELRP with...

Page 1949: ...nters Use the show log counters command to display event statistics Viewing and maintaining statistics on a regular basis allows you to see how well your network is performing If you keep simple daily...

Page 1950: ...on The arguments supported by this command are platform dependent use only in conjunction with Extreme Networks Technical Support personnel Default N A Usage Guidelines NOTE Use this command only unde...

Page 1951: ...writes them to the specified memory card in the following situations If an ExtremeWare XOS process fails When forced under the guidance of Extreme Networks Technical Support If you configure the switc...

Page 1952: ...information about installing an external compact flash memory card please refer to the Extreme Networks Consolidated XOS Hardware Installation Guide After you use the eject memorycard command and man...

Page 1953: ...d is backward compatible with Extreme Networks switches running ExtremeWare If your network contains switches running only ExtremeWare XOS you can also use the run elrp vlan_name ports ports interval...

Page 1954: ...lobally enable the ELRP client The ELRP client can be disabled globally so that none of the ELRP VLAN configurations take effect Use the disable elrp client command to globally disable the ELRP client...

Page 1955: ...led globally in order for it to work on any VLANs Use the enable elrp client command to globally enable the ELRP client The ELRP client can be disabled globally so that none of the ELRP VLAN configura...

Page 1956: ...1956 Example The following example starts periodic ELRP packet transmission on slot 3 port 2 of VLAN marketing sends packet transmissions every 2 seconds and sends messages to the log configure elrp c...

Page 1957: ...g ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 or earlier and experience a full hardware table that affects Layer 2 IP local host and IP multicast forwarding you see messages similar to the following in the log Info HAL IPv4...

Page 1958: ...om ExtremeWare XOS 11 4 or earlier with the hash algorithm set to crc16 when ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 loads the hash algorithm becomes crc32 To change the hash algorithm to crc16 use the configure forward...

Page 1959: ...no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines This command disables the ELRP globally so that none of the ELRP VLAN configurations take effect The ELRP client must be enabled globally in...

Page 1960: ...debug messages which can severely degrade performance For typical network device monitoring debug mode should remain disabled the default setting Debug mode should only be enabled when advised by tech...

Page 1961: ...ter you issue the eject memorycard command you can manually remove the card from the external compact flash slot on the MSM and read the data on the card If the configure debug coredumps memorycard co...

Page 1962: ...emeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1962 Platform Availability This command is availa...

Page 1963: ...command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines The ELRP client must be enabled globally in order for it to work on any VLANs The ELRP client can be disabled globally so that...

Page 1964: ...abled the default setting Debug mode should only be enabled when advised by technical support or when advanced diagnosis is required The debug mode setting is saved to FLASH The following configuratio...

Page 1965: ...itch for host names and remote IP addresses When specifying a host name or remote IP address the switch permits only the following characters Alphabetical letters upper case and lower case A Z a z Num...

Page 1966: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1966 Platform Availability This command is av...

Page 1967: ...O module is automatically reset and becomes operational again After the switch runs the diagnostic routine test results are saved in the module s EEPROM and messages are logged to the syslog extended...

Page 1968: ...e which takes the switch fabric and ports offline If you run diagnostics on a module that is not offline the switch automatically takes the switch fabric and ports offline when you use the run diagnos...

Page 1969: ...on the switch contact Extreme Networks Technical Support Example BlackDiamond 10808 switch and BlackDiamond 8800 series switch example The following command runs normal diagnostics on the I O module...

Page 1970: ...s on the stack ports on the Summit X450 family switch run diagnostics stack port If you issue this command with a console connection the switch displays the following information You also have the opp...

Page 1971: ...act of this test You also have the opportunity to continue or cancel the test Running Diagnostics will disrupt network traffic Are you sure you want to continue y n Enter y to continue and run the dia...

Page 1972: ...rks switches running only the ExtremeWare XOS software If your network contains switches running ExtremeWare XOS and switches running ExtremeWare use the configure elrp client one shot vlan_name ports...

Page 1973: ...S 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1973 Example The following command starts one time non periodic ELRP packet transmission on the VLAN green using the default interval and packet transmission run elrp gr...

Page 1974: ...bug information to the specified memory card The debug information includes log files and trace files Progress messages are displayed that indicate the file being copied and when the copying is finish...

Page 1975: ...nternal memory card use the configure debug core dumps internal memory command Modular Switches Only To configure a modular switch to write core dump files to the external memory card use the configur...

Page 1976: ...s and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1976 History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Support for the internal memory card was ad...

Page 1977: ...ate the test was run The day month date time and year the test was run Temperature The temperature of the module in celsius when the test was run Test data More detailed information about the test whi...

Page 1978: ...The switch displays the following diagnostic information If you have run diagnostics information includes the Date the test was run The month date and year the test was run Test data If the diagnostic...

Page 1979: ...wing command run diagnostics extended normal To run diagnostics on the Summit X450 family of switches use the following command run diagnostics extended normal stack port Depending on the software ver...

Page 1980: ...emperature 41 degrees C Diag Test Version 1 0 1 2 S N 05364 00058 CPU System Passed Register Test Passed Memory Test Passed System Test Passed Summary Diagnostics Pass The following command displays t...

Page 1981: ...rts Displays the set of VLAN ports used for packet transmission Interval Displays the configured interval An interval of 3 indicates that ELRP PDUs are transmitted every 3 seconds Count Lists the conf...

Page 1982: ...L Log T Trap C Callback History This command was first available in ExtremeWare XOS 11 1 Platform Availability This command is available on all platforms Action Displays the configured action the swi...

Page 1983: ...a switch reboot the switch uses this hash algorithm Current hash The hash algorithm currently used by the switch It is possible for the values of the configured hash and the current hash to be differe...

Page 1984: ...y the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1984 Platform Availability This command is available only on the BlackDiamond...

Page 1985: ...tion The arguments supported by this command are platform dependent use only in conjunction with Extreme Networks Technical Support personnel Default N A Usage Guidelines NOTE Use this command only un...

Page 1986: ...echnical Support personnel to view your switch configurations and to troubleshoot the switch The show tech command displays the output of the following show commands among others show bootprelay show...

Page 1987: ...onfiguration show log counters all show process detail This information can be useful for your technical support representative if you experience a problem Depending on the software version running on...

Page 1988: ...an change the display by typing a character while the display is active Table 33 displays the supported commands For more detailed information about the top command including display options command f...

Page 1989: ...e XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1989 Platform Availability This command is available on...

Page 1990: ...hot vlan_name ports ports all interval sec retry count log print print and log This command is backward compatible with Extreme Networks switches running the ExtremeWare software run elrp vlan_name po...

Page 1991: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1991 Platform Availability This command is av...

Page 1992: ...Troubleshooting Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1992...

Page 1993: ...btain all parts except the CNA Agent from your Avaya representative along with the accompanying documentation You configure and manage the CNA Agent using the CLI The CNA Agent is a downloadable softw...

Page 1994: ...nd resets the counters to zero Syntax Description This command has no arguments or variables Default N A Usage Guidelines You can also use the clear counters command to reset the internal counters for...

Page 1995: ...u use the CNA Agent only if you are running the Avaya CNA solution you must have other pieces of the CNA available from Avaya to run these tests You enter the IP address of the CNA server This command...

Page 1996: ...remeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 1996 Platform Availability This command is avail...

Page 1997: ...command The CNA Server attempts to establish the socket connection on the interface specified in the configure cna testplug vlan interface to conduct the actual tests The system uses the primary IP ad...

Page 1998: ...g Description Disables the CNA Agent Syntax This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines You must enable the CNA Agent before it can run the network tests requested by...

Page 1999: ...to test the network for throughput Syntax This command has no arguments or variables Default Disabled Usage Guidelines If you previously configured the IP address for the CNA Server and the VLAN inte...

Page 2000: ...The version of ExtremeWare XOS firmware running on the device Interface VLAN VLAN and virtual router interface the CNA Server uses to schedule and run the tests IP address on the interface IP address...

Page 2001: ...statistics and connection status on the BlackDiamond 10808 switch show cna testplug HW Name BlackDiamond 10808 Firmware Version 11 3 0 4 Interface VLAN Default on Virtual router VR Default IP address...

Page 2002: ...stening ports Test requests from ANS 50000 RTP test requests from test plugs 50001 RTP and Traceroute responses from test plugs 50016 Last Test RTP to 10 203 128 124 Result Last Test delay 0 136375 ji...

Page 2003: ...lldp med fast start repeat count configure lldp ports vendor specific avaya extreme call server configure lldp ports vendor specific avaya extreme dot1q framing configure lldp ports vendor specific a...

Page 2004: ...llowing are the commands that were added for ExtremeWare XOS release 11 4 clear counters traffic queue clear elsm ports auto restart clear elsm ports counters clear license info clear mac binding clea...

Page 2005: ...onfigure ports rate limit egress aggregate configure ports rate limit map cos high configure ports rate limit packet byte adjustment configure sharing lacp activity mode configure sharing lacp default...

Page 2006: ...ic queue show traffic queue statistics show traffic queue utilization tftp get tftp put traceroute mac port unconfigure mstp region unconfigure pim ssm range unconfigure ports aggregate bandwidth unco...

Page 2007: ...t vi Modified Commands for Release 11 4 The following are the commands that had keywords added or deleted for ExtremeWare XOS release 11 4 check policy configure vlan add ports stpd cp disable ipforwa...

Page 2008: ...start configure ospf restart grace period configure ospf restart helper configure power supply configure sharing lacp system priority configure sys recovery level slot create access list delete access...

Page 2009: ...of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 2009 show ports statistics show ports txerrors unconfigure access list Deleted Commands for Release 11...

Page 2010: ...Added Modified and Deleted Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 2010...

Page 2011: ...7 configure access list 831 configure access list add 833 configure access list delete 835 configure account 49 configure account encrypted 51 configure account password policy char validation 53 conf...

Page 2012: ...intermediate point 427 configure cfm domain association end point mepid 428 configure cfm domain association end point transmit interval 430 configure cfm domain delete association 432 configure cli...

Page 2013: ...elete proxy 1334 configure iparp max_entries 1335 configure iparp max_pending_entries 1336 configure iparp max_proxy_entries 1337 configure iparp timeout 1338 configure ip mtu vlan 302 configure iprou...

Page 2014: ...nfigure netlogin delete mac list 1056 configure netlogin dot1x eapol transmit version 1057 configure netlogin dot1x guest vlan 1058 configure netlogin dot1x timers 1060 configure netlogin move fail ac...

Page 2015: ...ess ports 886 configure qosprofile ports 888 configure qosprofile weight 890 configure qosscheduler 892 configure radius server client ip 958 configure radius shared secret 960 configure radius timeou...

Page 2016: ...ddelay 1182 configure stpd hellotime 1183 configure stpd maxage 1184 configure stpd max hop count 1185 configure stpd mode 1187 configure stpd ports cost 1189 configure stpd ports edge safeguard disab...

Page 2017: ...ports 794 create log filter 623 create netlogin local user 1072 create ospf area 1577 create ospfv3 area 1640 create protocol 754 create qosprofile 901 create stpd 1207 create svlan 755 create traffic...

Page 2018: ...disable ip option strict source route 1371 disable irdp 1373 disable jumbo frame ports 342 disable learning port 343 disable lldp ports 492 disable log debug mode 630 1960 disable log display 631 dis...

Page 2019: ...clipaging 89 enable cna testplug 1999 enable cpu monitoring 259 enable dhcp ports vlan 1005 enable dhcp vlan 179 enable diffserv examination port 916 enable diffserv replacement ports 917 enable dos p...

Page 2020: ...e 1492 enable rip use ip router alert 1493 enable ripng 1521 enable ripng export 1522 enable ripng originate default 1524 enable ripng poisonreverse 1525 enable ripng splithorizon 1526 enable ripng tr...

Page 2021: ...ckpoint data 191 show clear flow 1104 show clear flow acl modified 1105 show clear flow rule 1106 show clear flow rule all 1108 show clear flow rule triggered 1110 show cna testplug 2000 show configur...

Page 2022: ...uration 389 show ports information 392 show ports packet 398 show ports qosmonitor 929 show ports redundant 400 show ports rxerrors 687 show ports sharing 401 show ports statistics 690 show ports txer...

Page 2023: ...priority ports 553 unconfigure inline power usage threshold 554 unconfigure iparp 1414 unconfigure irdp 1415 unconfigure lldp 506 unconfigure log filter 710 unconfigure log target format 711 unconfigu...

Page 2024: ...ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 supports only the Summit X450 family of switches and the BlackDiamond 8800 series switch Index of Commands ExtremeWare XOS 11 5 Command Reference Guide 2024...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for ExtremeWare XOS 11.5

Red Hat NETWORK SATELLITE SERVER 4.0.5 Installation Manual preview
NETWORK SATELLITE SERVER 4.0.5
Brand: Red Hat Pages: 82
M-Audio Afro-Cuban Percussion Quick Start Manual preview
Afro-Cuban Percussion
Brand: M-Audio Pages: 5
Lexmark LexPrint User Manual preview
LexPrint
Brand: Lexmark Pages: 20
Epson PowerLite 955W Specification Sheet preview
PowerLite 955W
Brand: Epson Pages: 6
Epson Stylus Color 600Q Specification Sheet preview
Stylus Color 600Q
Brand: Epson Pages: 1
Epson Stylus Pro - Stylus Color Pro Ink Jet Printer Specification Sheet preview
Stylus Pro - Stylus Color Pro Ink Jet Printer
Brand: Epson Pages: 14
Epson Software Film Factory User Manual preview
Software Film Factory
Brand: Epson Pages: 73
Epson Stylus Pro - Stylus Color Pro Ink Jet Printer Reference Manual preview
Stylus Pro - Stylus Color Pro Ink Jet Printer
Brand: Epson Pages: 98
Epson Stylus Color 600Q User Manual preview
Stylus Color 600Q
Brand: Epson Pages: 95
Epson PowerLite 955W User Manual preview
PowerLite 955W
Brand: Epson Pages: 209
Epson PowerLite D6150 User Manual preview
PowerLite D6150
Brand: Epson Pages: 196
Valgrind BBV Quick Start Manual preview
BBV
Brand: Valgrind Pages: 319
HP Configuring Arrays Reference Manual preview
Configuring Arrays
Brand: HP Pages: 132
HP 413742-001 Troubleshooting Manual preview
413742-001
Brand: HP Pages: 26
HP 500 G2 Software User'S Manual preview
500 G2
Brand: HP Pages: 35
HP 460C - Deskjet Color Inkjet Printer User Manual preview
460C - Deskjet Color Inkjet Printer
Brand: HP Pages: 24
HP Compaq tc4200 Maintenance And Service Manual preview
Compaq tc4200
Brand: HP Pages: 201
HP BB118BV - StorageWorks Data Protector Express Package User Manual preview
BB118BV - StorageWorks Data Protector Express Package
Brand: HP Pages: 365

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands